Sie sind auf Seite 1von 364

Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.

Authored and published using

Copyright 2015 PTC Inc. and/or Its Subsidiary Companies. All Rights Reserved.
User and training guides and related documentation from PTC Inc. and its subsidiary companies
(collectively "PTC") are subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries
and are provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such
documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in
printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use
and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed.
Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided
by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This
documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including
electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written
consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without
notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no
responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains
valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the
United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium,
disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement
except with written prior approval from PTC.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL
DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is,
and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products, and
we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including
public and private surveillance resources. As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and
scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our software. This
data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized
distributors. If you are using an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection
and transmission of such data (including to the United States), cease using the illegal version, and
contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy.
Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information: See the About Box, or
copyright notice, of your PTC software.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND
This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and
Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a)
(JUN95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For
procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government
is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT88) or Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN87), as applicable. 01012015
PTC Inc., 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA
PRINTING HISTORY
Document No.

Date

Description

TRN-4517-M01-EN-LM-P01

01/16/2015

Initial Printing of:


Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0

Printed in the U.S.A

About PTC University


Welcome to PTC University!
With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge,
PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. Only
PTC University offers:
An innovative learning methodology PTCs Precision Learning
Methodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop and
deliver learning solutions.
Flexible Delivery Options PTC University ensures you receive the same
quality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensive
experience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modules
facilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity.
Premier Content and Expertise A thorough instructor certification process
and direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consulting
organizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualified
instructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practices
derived from thousands of deployments.
Global Focus PTC University delivers training where and when you
need it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countries
offering content in nine languages.
Delivering Value A role-based learning design ensures the right people
have the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting the
organizations overall performance goals.
The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learning
offerings that PTC University has available. These include:
Instructor-led Training (ILT) The ideal blend of classroom lectures,
personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, and
post-classroom tools.
Pro/FICIENCY This Web-based, skills assessment and
development-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity.
eLearning Libraries 24/7 access to Web-based training that will
compliment your instructor-led course.
Precision LMS A powerful learning management system that will manage
your eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments.
PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are
corporate learning programs designed to your organizations specific goals,
current skills, desired competencies, and training preferences.
Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most
out of your PTC products.

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers


North America
Education Services Registration
Tel: (888) 782-3773
Fax: (781) 370-5307
Technical Support (Monday - Friday)
Tel: (800) 477-6435
Fax: (781) 707-0328
License Management and Contracts
Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782)
Fax: (781) 707-0331

Europe
Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting
Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)

Asia
Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact
information.
In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web
site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions
to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technical
support, and register for online service options such as knowledge base
searches, reference libraries, and documentation. You can also find general
information about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer
Support, and PTC Partners.

Precision Learning
Precision Learning in the Classroom
PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop
effective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivity
of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proven
instructional design principal of Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do:
Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key
concepts.
These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the
software application.
You then apply the concepts through structured exercises.
After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided to enable you to
assess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also
identify the class topics that require further review.
At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment via
your PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training
on how to do this after the class.

Precision Learning After the Class


Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning
account. This account will be automatically created if you do not already
have one.
As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account:
A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a
Recommended Learning Report based on your results.
A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same
instructional approach of lecture, demonstration, and exercise. The
Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this training
that you may want to review.
Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages.
The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after the
live class.

Precision Learning Recommendations


PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associated
training are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps are
available for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section of
our Web site at http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.

Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and
that the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only.
Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map
corresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructor
recommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training that
corresponds to your role and job functions.

Training Agenda
Day 1
Module 01
Module 02
Module 03
Module 04
Module 05
Module 06
Module 07

Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process


Design Model Preparation
Design Model Analysis
Mold Models
Shrinkage
Workpieces
Mold Volume Creation

Parting Lines
Skirt Surfaces
Parting Surface Creation
Splitting Mold Volumes
Mold Component Extraction
Mold Features Creation
Filling and Opening the Mold

Day 2
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module
Module

08
09
10
11
12
13
14

Table of Contents
Mold Design using Creo Parametric 3.0
Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process ..................1-1
Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process ..........................................1-2
Design Model Preparation ............................................................2-1
Understanding Mold Theory ......................................................2-2
Preparing Design Models for the Mold Process .............................2-4
Creating Profile Rib Features .....................................................2-6
Creating Drafts Split at Sketch ...................................................2-9
Creating Drafts Split at Curve .................................................. 2-12
Creating Drafts Split at Surface ................................................ 2-15
Design Model Analysis .................................................................3-1
Analyzing Design Models Theory................................................3-2
Performing a Draft Check..........................................................3-3
Performing a Section Thickness Check ........................................3-7
Performing a Thickness Check................................................. 3-12
Mold Models ...............................................................................4-1
Creating New Mold Models .......................................................4-2
Analyzing Model Accuracy ........................................................4-7
Locating the Reference Model ................................................. 4-12
Assembling the Reference Model ............................................. 4-17
Creating the Reference Model ................................................. 4-21
Redefining the Reference Model .............................................. 4-26
Analyzing Reference Model Orientation ..................................... 4-28
Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout .................................................. 4-34
Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout....................................... 4-38
Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation................................... 4-42
Calculating Projected Area ...................................................... 4-46
Shrinkage ...................................................................................5-1
Understanding Shrinkage..........................................................5-2
Applying Shrinkage by Scale .....................................................5-4
Applying Shrinkage by Dimension...............................................5-8
Workpieces.................................................................................6-1
Creating Display Styles ............................................................6-2
Creating a Workpiece Automatically ............................................6-7
Creating a Custom Automatic Workpiece ................................... 6-11
Creating and Assembling a Workpiece Manually.......................... 6-13
Reclassifying and Removing Mold Model Components ................. 6-18
Mold Volume Creation ..................................................................7-1

Surfacing Terms ......................................................................7-2


Understanding Mold Volumes ....................................................7-4
Sketching Mold Volumes...........................................................7-6
Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts ...................................... 7-10
Sketching Slider Mold Volumes ................................................ 7-15
Creating a Reference Part Cutout ............................................. 7-21
Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes ................................................. 7-26
Replacing Surfaces and Trimming to Geometry ........................... 7-30
Sketching Insert Mold Volumes ................................................ 7-35
Parting Lines ..............................................................................8-1
Understanding Parting Lines......................................................8-2
Creating an Automatic Parting Line Using Silhouette Curves ............8-3
Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Slides ..................................8-8
Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Loop Selection..................... 8-11
Skirt Surfaces .............................................................................9-1
Understanding Parting Surfaces .................................................9-2
Creating a Skirt Surface............................................................9-3
Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend Curves............................9-8
Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent Conditions.................... 9-12
Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension Directions .................. 9-17
Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff Extension ..................... 9-22
Parting Surface Creation ............................................................ 10-1
Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation Tools ........................ 10-2
Merging Surfaces .................................................................. 10-7
Creating a Shadow Surface ................................................... 10-11
Creating a Parting Surface Manually ....................................... 10-16
Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces ........................................... 10-17
Creating Fill Surfaces ........................................................... 10-22
Extending Curves ................................................................ 10-26
Filling Loops....................................................................... 10-32
Creating Shut Offs ............................................................... 10-36
Splitting Mold Volumes............................................................... 11-1
Splitting the Workpiece ........................................................... 11-2
Splitting Mold Volumes ........................................................... 11-6
Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting Surfaces ....................... 11-11
Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items ....................................... 11-15
Analyzing Split Classification ................................................. 11-19
Mold Component Extraction ....................................................... 12-1
Extracting Mold Components from Volumes ................................ 12-2
Applying Start Models to Mold Components ................................ 12-6
Mold Features Creation .............................................................. 13-1

Creating Waterline Circuits ...................................................... 13-2


Analyzing Waterline End Conditions .......................................... 13-6
Performing a Waterlines Check .............................................. 13-10
Understanding Mold Analysis Settings ..................................... 13-15
Creating Sprues and Runners ................................................ 13-17
Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes ...................................... 13-23
Creating UDFs.................................................................... 13-29
Placing UDFs ..................................................................... 13-34
Filling and Opening the Mold ...................................................... 14-1
Creating a Molding ................................................................ 14-2
Opening the Mold .................................................................. 14-4
Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step......................................... 14-9
Interference Checking a Mold Opening Step ............................. 14-12
Viewing Mold Information ...................................................... 14-15

Student Preface Using the Header


In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and
the header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric.
Course Handbook Layout:
Modules
Topics
Concept
Theory
Procedure
Exercise (if applicable)
Procedure / Exercise Header:

Course Handbook Layout


The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate
information after the course is complete. Each course is organized into
modules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics,
with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each
individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections:

Concept This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and
is presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically with
figures and bullets.
Theory This section provides detailed information about content
introduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but not
shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additional
paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures.
Procedure This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to
complete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused,
and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbook
only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics that
contain only Concept and Theory.
Exercise Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are
typically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models.
Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have an
associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide
and/or the online exercise HTML files.
The first module for certain courses is known as a process
module. Process modules introduce you to the generic high-level
processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.

Procedure / Exercise Header


To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as labs) as
concise as possible, each begins with a header. The header lists the name
of the lab, the working directory, and the file you are to open.
The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable:
1. Procedure/Exercise Name This is the name of the lab.
2. Scenario This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The
Scenario is only found in Exercises.
3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed A reminder that you should
close any open files and erase them from memory:
Click Close
4.

5.

until the icon is no longer displayed.

and then click OK.


Click Erase Not Displayed
Folder Name This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are
stored in topic folders within specific functional area folders. The path to
the lab files is:
PTCU\CreoParametric3\functional_area_folder\topic_folder
In the example, Round is the functional area folder and Variable
is the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory to
PTCU\CreoParametric3\Round\Variable.
To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or
browser, and select Set Working Directory.
Model to Open This is the file to be opened from the working
directory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to
open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. If
you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead
create a new model, you will see Create New.

6.
7.

To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and
select Open.
Task Name Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one
or more tasks within a lab.
Lab Steps These are the individual steps required to complete
a task.

Two other items to note for labs:


Saving Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless
otherwise stated.
Exercises Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.

Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs


Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you
configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab
exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on a
computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps:
Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such
as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric3\.
Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as
the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric3\.
Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.
The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric3 folder.
You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.

PROCEDURE - Student Preface Using the Header


In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo
Parametric working environment for each lab in the course.
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder
Step 1:

EXTRUDE_1.PRT

Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run


the lab exercises properly.
Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer
outside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.

1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:.
The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically,
such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric3.
2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut.
Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop.
Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties.
Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be
PTCU\CreoParametric3.
3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut.
The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric3 folder.
You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
Step 2:

Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to
avoid any possible conflicts.

1. If you currently have files open, click Close


toolbar, until the icon no longer displays.

from the Quick Access

2. Click Erase Not Displayed


from the Data group in the ribbon.
Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.

Step 3:

Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure
and set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametric
working directory.

1. Notice the
SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_
Folder as indicated in the header
above.
2. If necessary, select the Folder
Browser
navigator.

tab from the

3. Click Working Directory


to view the current working
directory folder in the browser.
Double-click
SampleFunctionalArea.

4. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set Working


Directory.
5. Click Working Directory from the Common Folders section to display
the contents of the new working directory in the browser.

Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the


browser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click and
select Set Working Directory from the browser.
Step 4:

Open the file for this procedure.

1. Notice the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the header


above.
Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.
2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab:
Read the first task.
Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial
datum display for the procedure or exercise.
Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.
Step 5:

Set the initial datum display options.

1. The instruction for setting the datum display indicates which Datum
Display types to enable and disable. For example, Enable only the
following Datum Display types:

2. To set the datum display, first click the Datum Display drop-down
menu from the In Graphics toolbar.

3. Next, enable and disable the


check boxes as necessary. For
example you could disable the
Select All check box, and then
enable only the desired datum
types.

4. The model should now appear


as shown.

This completes the procedure.

Module

Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic


Mold Process
Module Overview
In this module, you learn about the basic mold process that is typically used
to take a part from its design stage to the creation of its mold. This simplified
process is used at most companies; however, your specific company process
may differ. The process is explained in further detail throughout the course
modules.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Run a draft check on a design model.
Create a new mold model and assemble the reference model and
workpiece.
Create a slider mold volume for undercut geometry.
Create the mold parting surface using a skirt surface.
Create the mold components by splitting the mold volumes and generating
the cavity components.
Create mold features by creating a runner in the mold model.
Fill and open the mold by creating a molding and performing a mold
opening analysis.

2015 PTC

Module 1 | Page 1

Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process


The basic mold process can be summarized in seven high-level
steps:
1.

2.

3.

4.
5.

6.

7.

Preparing and Analyzing


Design Models
Drafts and draft/thickness
checks.
Creating the Mold Model
Reference model, shrinkage,
and workpiece.
Creating Mold Volumes
Sliders and other sketched
volumes.
Creating Parting Surfaces
Creating Mold Components
Split Mold Volumes and
create cavity insert parts.
Creating Mold Features
Waterlines, runners, and
ejector pin holes.
Filling and Opening the Mold
Create a molding and open
the mold.

Figure 1 Analyzing a
Design Model

Figure 2 Creating the Mold


Model and Parting Surface

Figure 3 Filling and Opening


the Mold

Preparing and Analyzing Design Models


When you create a mold for a design model, you should first inspect the
model and analyze it to verify that it is indeed ready to be molded. Typically,
the reference model geometry that you use for a mold model is derived from
the design model. You can analyze the design model and reference model
for adequate draft features and consistent thickness, adding draft features if
necessary. It is critical that the final reference model has sufficient draft so
that it can be cleanly ejected from the mold.

Creating the Mold Model


Start the mold design by creating a mold manufacturing model. Creo
Parametric automatically creates the mold assembly when you create the
mold manufacturing model. The mold manufacturing model is also referred to
as the Mold Model. Next, you assemble the reference model, which can be
either the design model that is to be molded or a new model derived from
the design model. You can account for the contraction of the molding part
during cooling in the molding process by applying a shrinkage factor to the
reference model. You also create or assemble the workpiece that represents
Module 1 | Page 2

2015 PTC

the full volume of all the mold components that are needed to complete the
mold model.

Creating Mold Volumes


You can create mold volumes manually using sketch-based features. A
mold volume is a three-dimensional, enclosed surface quilt with no mass
in the workpiece of a mold model. You can also manually create a special
type of mold volume called a slider. Creo Parametric can also create one
automatically by calculating undercut areas in the mold model.

Creating Parting Surfaces


You can create parting surfaces for the mold model using the skirt surface
technique. The skirt surface technique requires parting lines that you create
by using silhouette curves. You can use the parting surfaces to split the
workpiece into separate mold volumes later in the mold design process. You
can also create parting surfaces manually.

Creating Mold Components


You can split the workpiece volume into one or more mold volumes based
on the parting surfaces. The main mold volumes are classified into core
and cavity. Once the desired mold volumes are created and split, you can
create the mold components, including sliders, from the mold volumes. The
mold components are fully functional parts that you can open and modify in
the Part mode of Creo Parametric. You can also machine the components
using Creo NC.

Creating Mold Features


You can create regular and user-defined assembly features to facilitate the
molding process. Regular features include mold-specific features such as
waterlines, runners, and ejector-pin clearance holes. You can also create
user-defined features from regular cuts and slots that are placed on mold
models to create sprues.

Filling and Opening the Mold


You can create the molding component that represents the filled mold cavity.
Creo Parametric creates the molding component automatically by determining
the volume remaining in the workpiece after extracting the mold components.
You can then define the steps for the mold-opening process for every
component in the mold model except the reference model and workpiece.
During the mold opening analysis, you can determine whether there is
interference with any static components for each of the steps that you define.

2015 PTC

Module 1 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creo Parametric Basic Mold Process


Objectives
After successfully completing this exercise, you will be able to:

Prepare and analyze a design model for manufacturing.


Create a mold model.
Create mold volumes.
Create a parting surface.
Create mold components.
Create mold features.
Fill and open the resulting mold.

You are a design engineer in a camera company. You have been provided
with the front housing of a new camera design and are tasked with creating
the manufacturing mold for it. You know from previously received models
that you must first prepare and analyze the design model to verify that it
can be manufactured.
Once you have verified that the design model can be manufactured using
a mold, you can create the mold model and mold volumes. You can then
create the mold-parting surface and mold components. Finally, you can fill
and open the resulting mold.
Close Window
Process\Mold
Step 1:

Erase Not Displayed


CAMERA.PRT

Prepare and analyze a design model for manufacturing.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:

2. In the ribbon, select the


Applications tab.
3. Click Mold/Cast
from the
Engineering group to toggle from
the standard application to the
Mold application.
4. Click Draft
group.

Module 1 | Page 4

from the Analysis

2015 PTC

5. To perform a draft check, do the


following:
In the model tree, select
CAMERA.PRT.
In the Draft Analysis dialog
box, clear the Use the pull
direction check box.
Click in the Direction collector
and select datum plane TOP.
Type 0.5 as the value for the
Draft angle and press ENTER.
6. In the Color Scale dialog box,
click Expand

7. Edit the number of colors to 3.


The positive draft areas
appear in blue and the
negative draft areas in red.
The vertical walls appear
in gray. This demonstrates
that the part is fully drafted
and is ready to be used in
creating a mold model.

8. Click OK from the Draft Analysis dialog box.


9. Click Close

2015 PTC

from the Quick Access toolbar.

Module 1 | Page 5

Step 2:

Create the camera mold model.

1. Click New
from the Quick
Access toolbar.
2. In the New dialog box, do the
following:
Select Manufacturing as the
Type.
Select Mold cavity as the
Sub-type.
Type camera_mold as the
Name.
Clear the Use default
template check box and
click OK.
Select the mmns_mfg_mold
template.
Click OK.
3. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category.
Click Add.
Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field.
Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK > No.
4. Select Locate Reference Model
from the Reference Model
types drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
group to assemble the reference
model.
5. In the Open dialog box, select
CAMERA.PRT and click Open.
6. In the Create Reference Model
dialog box, select Same model
as the Reference model type
and click OK.
7. Specify the mold cavity layout by
doing the following:
Click Reference Model Origin
from the Layout dialog
box and select the MAIN
coordinate system in the
CAMERA.PRT sub-window.
Click Preview and notice
how the reference model is
assembled and oriented.

Module 1 | Page 6

2015 PTC

8. In the Layout dialog box, select


Rectangular as the Layout.
Select X-Symmetric as the
Orientation.
Type 120 as the X Increment
value and 150 as the Y
Increment value.
Click Preview.
Notice that a pattern of
reference models, symmetric
about the X-axis, are
assembled to create a
multi-cavity mold.
9. In the Layout dialog box, select
Y-Symmetric as the Orientation
and click Preview.
10. Notice that a pattern of reference
models, symmetric about the
Y-axis, are assembled to create
a multi-cavity mold.
11. Select Single as the Layout to
create a single-cavity mold and
click OK.
12. In the Warning message window,
click OK to accept the change in
the absolute accuracy value.
13. Apply shrinkage to the reference
model by doing the following:
Select Shrink by scale
from the Shrinkage types
drop-down menu in the
Modifiers group.
In the model tree, click the
node for CAMERA.PRT to
expand it and select the
PRT_CSYS_DEF coordinate
system.
Type 0.005 as the Shrink Ratio
in the Shrinkage By Scale
dialog box and press ENTER.
Click Apply Changes

2015 PTC

Module 1 | Page 7

14. Select Automatic Workpiece


from the Workpiece
types drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
group to create an automatic
workpiece.
15. In the Automatic Workpiece
dialog box, do the following:
Select the MOLD_DEF_CSYS
coordinate system from the
graphics window as the Mold
Origin.
Type 20 for the negative, and
type 20 for the positive X
direction values.
Type 30 for the negative, and
type 30 for the positive Y
direction values.
Type 20 for the negative, and
type 20 for the positive Z
direction values.
Click OK.
16. Disable Plane Display
Csys Display

and

17. Select CAMERA_MOLD_WRK.


PRT.
18. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
19. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
20. Select the Mold tab.

Module 1 | Page 8

2015 PTC

Step 3:

Create slider mold volumes.

1. Select Mold Volume


from the Mold Volume types drop-down
menu in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group to create the slider
volume.
2. To rename the mold volume feature, do the following:
from the Controls group.
Click Properties
Type Slider as the Name of the mold volume in the Properties
dialog box and press ENTER.
3. Click Slider

from the Volume Tools group.

4. In the Slider Volume dialog box,


do the following:
Click Calculate Undercut
.
Boundaries
Press CTRL and select Quilt
1 and Quilt 2 from the Exclude
column.
Click Include Boundary
to add the
Surfaces
selected quilts to the Include
column for slider calculation.
Click Select Projection Plane
and select the right surface
of the workpiece.
5. Click Apply Changes
from
the Slider Volume dialog box.
6. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

You can also manually


sketch the shape of the
slider volume to represent a
standard shape that can be
manufactured.

2015 PTC

Module 1 | Page 9

Step 4:

Create a parting surface.

1. Click Silhouette Curve


from
the Design Features group to
automatically create parting line
curves.
2. In the Silhouette Curve dialog
box, click Preview to observe the
silhouette curves automatically
created at all edges of the mold
model.
3. Notice that some adjustments
need to be made to the automatic
parting line curves.
4. In the Silhouette Curve dialog
box, double-click Slides.
Select the slider volume from
the graphics window.
Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.

5. In the Silhouette Curve


dialog box, double-click Loop
Selection.
Select the Chains tab.
Select chain 41 and click
Lower to move the curve from
the upper edge to the lower
edge of the hole.
Click OK from the Loop
Selection dialog box.

6. Click OK from the Silhouette


Curve dialog box to complete the
parting line.

Module 1 | Page 10

2015 PTC

7. Click Parting Surface


from
the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
8. Click Skirt Surface
from the
Surfacing group to create an
automatic parting surface.
9. Select the workpiece.
10. Select the silhouette curve.
11. Click Done from the menu
manager.
12. In the Skirt Surface dialog box,
double-click Extension.
13. In the Extension Control dialog
box, select the Extension
Directions tab.
Click Add.
Press CTRL and select the
two vertices.
14. Click OK from the Select dialog
box.
15. Click Done from the menu
manager.
16. Query-select the left surface of
the workpiece as the normal
plane.
17. Click Okay from the menu
manager.
18. Click OK to close the Extension
Control dialog box.
19. Click OK from the Skirt Surface
dialog box.
20. Click OK
from the Controls
group to complete the parting
surface.

2015 PTC

Module 1 | Page 11

Step 5:

Create the mold components.

1. Select Volume Split


from the
Mold Volume types drop-down
menu in the Parting Surface &
Mold Volume group to split the
workpiece into mold volumes.
2. Click Two Volumes > All
Wrkpcs > Done from the menu
manager.
3. Select the slider and click OK
from the Select dialog box.
4. Click OK from the Split dialog
box.
5. In the Properties dialog box, type main_vol as the Name of the first
volume and press ENTER.
6. In the Properties dialog box, type slider_vol as the Name of the
second volume and press ENTER.
7. Click Volume Split
to split
the main volume into core and
cavity inserts.
8. Click Two Volumes > Mold
Volume > Done .
9. In the Search Tool dialog box, do
the following:
Select Quilt: F11(MAIN_VOL)
from the list of items found.
to add
Click Add Item
the selected quilt to the list of
items selected.
Click Close.
10. Select the parting surface (you
may have to use query select)
and click OK from the Select
dialog box.
11. Click OK from the Split dialog
box.
12. In the Properties dialog box, type core as the Name of the first volume
(the lower half) and press ENTER.
13. In the Properties dialog box, type cavity as the Name of the second
volume (the upper half) and press ENTER.

Module 1 | Page 12

2015 PTC

14. Select Cavity insert


from the Mold Component
types drop-down menu in the
Components group.
15. In the Create Mold Component
dialog box, press CTRL and
select CAVITY, CORE, and
SLIDER.
Click OK.
16. Notice that the mold components
appear as individual solid parts
in the model tree.
17. In the model tree, right-click
CORE.PRT and select Open.
18. Click Close

19. In the ribbon, select the View tab.


20. Click Mold Display

from the Visibility group.

21. Select the Mold tab.


22. In the Blank and Unblank dialog box, press CTRL and select
CAMERA, CAMERA_MOLD_WRK, and CORE from the Visible
Components list and click Blank.
Click Parting surface
as the Filter.
Select PART_SURF_1 and click Blank.
Click Volume
as the Filter.
Select SLIDER_VOL and click Blank.
Click OK.
23. In the model tree, right-click SILH_CURVE_1 and select Hide

2015 PTC

Module 1 | Page 13

Step 6:

Create a runner mold feature.

1. Click Runner
from the
Production Features group.
2. Click Half Round from the menu
manager.
3. Type 3 as the runner diameter
and press ENTER.
4. Query-select the bottom surface
as the Sketching Plane and click
Okay > Default from the menu
manager.
5. Click Sketch View
In Graphics toolbar.

from the

6. Select datum plane


MOLD_RIGHT and the top
and bottom edges as references,
and click Close from the
References dialog box.
7. Click Line Chain
and sketch
two lines of equal length.
8. Click One-by-One
the length to 29.
9. Click OK

and edit

10. Press CTRL+D and select


CAVITY.PRT as the intersected
component.
11. Click OK from the Intersected
Components dialog box.
12. Click OK from the Runner dialog
box.
13. In the model tree, right-click
CORE.PRT and select Unblank.

Module 1 | Page 14

2015 PTC

Step 7:

Fill and open the mold.

1. Click Create Molding


from
the Components group to create
the molding.
2. Type camera_molding as the
Part name and press ENTER.
3. Press ENTER to accept the
default Mold Part Common
Name.

4. Click Mold Opening


from
the Analysis group to perform a
mold-opening analysis.
5. Click Define Step > Define
Move from the menu manager.
6. Select SLIDER.PRT.
7. Click OK in the Select dialog box.

8. Select the edge to define the


direction of the move.
9. Type -100 as the translation
value and press ENTER.
10. Click Done from the menu
manager.

11. Click Define Step > Define


Move from the menu manager.
12. Select CAVITY.PRT.
13. Click OK in the Select dialog box.

2015 PTC

Module 1 | Page 15

14. Select the edge to define the


direction of the move.
15. Type 100 as the translation value
and press ENTER.
16. Click Done from the menu
manager.

17. Click Define Step > Define


Move from the menu manager.
18. Select CORE.PRT.
19. Click OK in the Select dialog box.

20. Select the edge to define the


direction of the move.
21. Type -100 as the translation
value and press ENTER.

22. Click Done from the menu


manager.
23. Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.

Module 1 | Page 16

2015 PTC

24. Click in the background to de-select all items.


25. Click Regenerate
26. Click Save
the model.

from the Quick Access toolbar.

from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK to save

27. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All
, and click OK to erase the model from memory.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 1 | Page 17

Module 1 | Page 18

2015 PTC

Module

Design Model Preparation


Module Overview
It is not uncommon for designers to hand off design models without drafts or
ribs because they do not know enough about mold design in order to make
decisions about parting surfaces and pull direction, and they may not be
comfortable with specifying draft angles or creating ribs. The reference model
geometry for a mold model is derived from the corresponding design model
geometry. Consequently, the mold designer may have to prepare the design
model so that a mold can be created from it.
In this module, you learn the basics of mold design and how to prepare a
design model for the mold process.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Define the main components of a mold.
Specify the names of the various paths used to flow material into the mold.
Recall the items typically required of a design model to create a robust
mold and part.
Create a robust mold model by creating profile rib features.
Apply your knowledge of what makes a robust mold by defining draft and
splitting it using various techniques.

2015 PTC

Module 2 | Page 1

Understanding Mold Theory


The mold designer creates the mold and its components using
Creo Parametric's Mold mode.
A mold consists of a core and
cavity.
Sprues and runners channel
material into the void.
Ejector pins eject the solidified
part.

Figure 1 Moldbase Layout


Created in EMX

Figure 2 Mold Core and Cavity

Figure 3 Sprue and Runner


Design

Understanding Manufacturing Mold Theory


From a manufacturing point of view, in its simplest form, a mold consists of
a core and cavity which are split at a parting line. The core is the convex
feature side of the mold that enters an opposing cavity when the mold is
closed. The cavity is the concave feature side of the mold into which an
opposing core enters when the mold is closed. An example of a mold core
and cavity is shown in Figure 2. The void between the closed core and cavity
is filled with a material such as plastic. This material-filled void becomes
the resulting part when it solidifies.
For the material to find its way into the void, there must be various chambers
and paths created in the mold. These chambers are defined as follows:
Sprues The route the plastic material takes from the point where it enters
the mold until it reaches the runners. When solidified, it remains attached
to the part via one or more runners and is typically removed in finishing.
Module 2 | Page 2

2015 PTC

Runners and gates Channels machined into the mold that direct the
plastic material from the sprue into the mold cavity.
In Figure 3, you can see the sprue, runners, and gates attached to the four
molded pucks.
Once the material solidifies, the part can be removed from the mold. To aid in
ejecting the part, mold components called ejector pins are often designed into
the mold. The sizes and arrangement of the pins are selected to minimize the
impact on the part design.

Understanding CAD Mold Theory


From a CAD point of view, a designer typically hands off a completed or
nearly completed Creo Parametric design model to a mold designer. The
mold designer then takes the design model and uses it to create a Reference
model within Creo Parametric's Mold mode. The mold designer uses the
Reference model to create the resulting mold core and cavity components
which create the void of the Reference model. The mold core and cavity
components split at a location called the parting surface, which the mold
designer must determine.
Once the mold designer creates the mold components in Creo Parametric's
Mold mode, he or she can use the Expert Moldbase Extension to create
the entire moldbase layout. The Expert Moldbase Extension, or EMX, uses
a 2-D process-driven GUI to guide the mold designer toward the optimal
design. It uses a catalog of standard components (DME, HASCO, FUTABA,
PROGRESSIVE, STARK, and so on), or customized components. Figure 1
shows a completed moldbase that was developed with the Expert Moldbase
Extension.
Mold Design using Creo Parametric focuses only on the creation of the mold
components and does not cover the Expert Moldbase Extension.

2015 PTC

Module 2 | Page 3

Preparing Design Models for the Mold Process


You may not be able to create a mold from a perfectly valid
design model.
Design model requirements for
molding typically include:
Draft on vertical surfaces.
Uniform thickness.
Ribs.
Ejector pin pads.
Preparation guidelines:
Draft applied to vertical faces.
Ribs should be about half the
model thickness and drafted
where needed.
Create ejector pin pads where
needed.
Reorder or insert draft features
before rounds if possible.

Figure 1 Original Design Model

Figure 2 Design Model


Prepared for Molding

Preparing Design Models for the Mold Process


Even though the design model you receive may be a valid design model, you
may not be able to use the model to create a robust mold. The following items
are typically required of the design model to create a robust mold and part:
Draft Facilitates the removal of the part from the mold.
Uniform thickness Areas of a part that are thicker than others can result
in sink zones or warping when cooling occurs.
Ribs Add strength and rigidity to the molded part.
Ejector pin pads Sufficient material is needed for the full diameter of
an ejector pin at the location where it pushes against the resulting part to
eject it from the mold.
These items may not be present in the design model when you receive it
because the design engineer does not know where the parting surface or
ejector pins will be located in the mold. Therefore, you must prepare the
design model for the mold process by adding the necessary features needed
to make a mold from the model.
Module 2 | Page 4

2015 PTC

Guidelines for Proper Design Model Preparation


The following guidelines indicate how to properly prepare a design model
for molding.
Try to create models that are of uniform thickness to prevent sink zones or
warping in the resulting molded part.
Create ribs that are approximately half the model's wall thickness to prevent
sink. Apply draft to the rib walls if they are vertical faces. Vertical faces
are those that are vertical with respect to how the mold opens. In Figure 2,
two ribs have been created and draft has been applied.
Be aware of the need to accommodate ejector pins in your design model for
proper ejection from the mold. Create ejector pin pads at these locations
in the model where the ejector pins push against the model to eject it. In
Figure 2, four ejector pin pads have been created.
Apply draft in the proper direction at least 0.5 degrees on all vertical
faces. Draft has been applied to all faces that are vertical with respect to
how the mold opens.
When creating Draft features in Creo Parametric, either reorder them to be
created before any related rounds or insert them before the rounds. This
practice results in a more robust Creo Parametric model. In Figure 2, the
draft has been inserted before the adjacent rounds.

2015 PTC

Module 2 | Page 5

Creating Profile Rib Features


A profile rib feature is similar to an extruded protrusion, except
that it requires an open section sketch.
Profile rib features require an open
sketch.
You can edit the side that thickens.
You can flip to which side of the
sketch you want to create the rib.
Rib geometry adapts to the
adjacent, solid geometry.
Figure 1 Viewing Open Sketches

Figure 2 Editing the Side


that Thickens

Figure 3 Flipping Which Side


the Rib is Created

Creating Profile Rib Features


Ribs are typically used to strengthen parts. A profile rib feature is similar to an
extruded protrusion, except that it requires an open section sketch. The rib
also conforms to existing planar or cylindrical geometry when it is extruded.
After you select an open section sketch and set a thickness, Creo Parametric
automatically creates the profile rib feature by merging it with your model.
The system can add material above or below the sketch, and the thickness
can be applied on either side, or be symmetric about the sketch. The Profile
Rib
enables you to create rib features in less time than it would take for
you to create and sketch a protrusion.

Module 2 | Page 6

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Profile Rib Features


Close Window
Rib\Profile
Task 1:

Erase Not Displayed


RIB.PRT

Create profile rib features on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select Profile Rib
from the
Rib types drop-down menu in the
Engineering group.
3. Select RIB_SKETCH-1.
4. Drag the handle and edit the
width to 75.
5. Click Complete Feature
from the dashboard.
Notice the angled rib surface is not planar; it is contoured to
match the curved surface which is adjacent to the sketch.
6. Click Profile Rib

7. Select RIB_SKETCH-2 .
8. Orient to the RIGHT view
orientation.
9. Drag the handle and edit the
width to 25. The rib is centered
about the sketch.
10. Click Change Thickness
Option
from the dashboard.
The rib moves to the left of the
sketch.

2015 PTC

Module 2 | Page 7

11. Click Change Thickness


Option
again. The rib moves
to the right of the sketch.
12. Click Complete Feature

13. Reorient the model.


14. Click Profile Rib

15. Select RIB_SKETCH-3 . The rib


is above the sketch.

16. Click the arrow in the graphics


window. The rib is now on the
bottom of the sketch.
17. Click Complete Feature

This completes the procedure.

Module 2 | Page 8

2015 PTC

Creating Drafts Split at Sketch


You can use a sketch to define custom split lines.

Sketch becomes linked.


Sketch can be unlinked.
A new sketch can be defined.
Sketch need not lie on draft surface.

Figure 1 Viewing Sketch

Figure 2 Draft Split at Sketch

Creating Drafts Split at Sketch


You can specify a sketch to be used as the split object. This enables you to
create custom split lines. When you select an existing sketch as the split
object, it becomes linked. However, you can unlink the sketch if desired. You
can also define a new sketch. If the sketch does not lie on the draft surface,
Creo Parametric projects it onto the draft surface in the direction normal to
the sketching plane. The sketch in Figure 1 was used as the Split object for
the draft in Figure 2.

2015 PTC

Module 2 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Sketch


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Draft\Split-Sketch
Task 1:

DRAFT_SPLIT-SKETCH.PRT

Create a draft split at a sketch.

1. Disable all Datum display types.


2. Select Draft
from the Draft
types drop-down menu.
Select the large, front surface
containing the sketch.
3. Right-click and select Draft
Hinges.
Select the top surface of the
left rectangular step.
4. Drag the angle so the upper draft
portion goes into the model.
5. In the dashboard, select the
Split tab.
Select Split by split object as
the Split option.
Select sketch SPLIT_
SKETCH.
Select Draft second side
only as the Side option.
6. Drag the angle so the draft goes
into the model.
7. Click Preview Feature

8. Click Resume Feature

9. In the dashboard, select the


Split tab.
Select Draft first side only as
the Side option.
10. Click Preview Feature

Module 2 | Page 10

2015 PTC

11. Click Resume Feature

12. In the dashboard, select the


Split tab.
Select Draft sides
independently as the Side
option.
Edit both draft angles to 7 so
the draft goes into the model.
13. Click Complete Feature

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 2 | Page 11

Creating Drafts Split at Curve


You can create a draft that splits at a waistline curve.
Material at the curve remains constant.

Figure 1 The Datum Curve

Figure 2 Draft Split at


Datum Curve

Creating Drafts Split at Curve


You can create a draft that splits at a waistline curve. This causes the
material at the curve to remain constant. The curve shown in Figure 1 was
used as the draft hinge. The draft was then split at this draft hinge to create
the resulting geometry in Figure 2.
If you specify a curve as the draft hinge, you must also specify a separate
pull direction reference.

Module 2 | Page 12

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Curve


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Draft\Split-Curve
Task 1:

DRAFT_SPLIT-CURVE.PRT

Create a draft split at a curve.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select Draft
from the Draft
types drop-down list.
Select the front surface.
3. Right-click and select Draft
Hinges.
Select the curve.
4. Right-click and select Pull
Direction.
Select datum plane TOP from
the model tree.

5. Edit the draft angle to 10.


6. In the dashboard, click Reverse
Angle
.
7. Click Preview Feature

8. Click Resume Feature

9. In the dashboard, select the


Split tab.
Select Split by draft hinge as
the Split option.
Select Draft sides
dependently as the Side
option.
10. Click Reverse Angle

2015 PTC

Module 2 | Page 13

11. Click Complete Feature

12. Notice that this draft has removed


material from the top and bottom
of the model.

This completes the procedure.

Module 2 | Page 14

2015 PTC

Creating Drafts Split at Surface


You can create a draft that splits at a waistline surface, causing
material at the surface to be added.
Additional draft hinges can be
created.
You must first split the draft
surfaces.
Material remains the same size
at both draft hinge locations.
Figure 1 Draft Split at Surface

Figure 2 Splitting the Draft


at Surface

Figure 3 Selecting Multiple


Draft Hinges

Creating Drafts Split at Surface


You can create a draft that splits at a waistline surface, causing material at
the surface to be added, as shown in Figure 1. This type of draft enables you
to select additional draft hinges. To select a second hinge, you must first split
the draft surfaces. The model remains the same size at both draft hinge
locations. In Figure 2, the selected surface is used as the split object. Once
this split object was defined, a second draft hinge was able to be added,
as shown in Figure 3.

2015 PTC

Module 2 | Page 15

PROCEDURE - Creating Drafts Split at Surface


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Draft\Split-Surface
Task 1:

DRAFT_SPLIT-SURFACE.PRT

Create a draft split at a surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select Draft
from the Draft
types drop-down list.
Select the front surface.

3. Right-click and select Draft


Hinges.
Select an edge on the front of
the top surface.
Press SHIFT, cursor over an
adjacent edge, right-click to
query, and select the upper
Tangent chain.
4. Right-click and select Pull
Direction.
Select datum plane TOP from
the model tree.
5. Edit the draft angle to 10.

6. In the dashboard, select the


Split tab.
Select Split by split object as
the Split option.
Select the surface quilt.
7. Edit the lower draft angle to 10.
8. Click Reverse Angle
lower draft angle.

Module 2 | Page 16

for the

2015 PTC

9. In the dashboard, select the


References tab.
10. Right-click and select Draft
Hinges.
Press CTRL and select an
edge on the front of the bottom
surface.
Press SHIFT, cursor over an
adjacent edge, right-click to
query, and select the bottom
Tangent Chain.
The Draft hinges collector
should contain two Tangent
Chains.
11. Click Complete Feature

12. In the model tree, right-click


QUILT and select Hide

13. Note that this draft has added


material to the center of the
model.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 2 | Page 17

Module 2 | Page 18

2015 PTC

Module

Design Model Analysis


Module Overview
Creo Parametric enables you to analyze the design model for key elements
such as proper draft and thickness before creating the mold model. These
tools help you ensure that the design model is acceptable to begin mold
creation.
In this module, you perform draft and thickness checks on design models.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Understand the different types of analyses you can perform on a design
model.
Perform a draft check on a design model.
Perform a section thickness check on a design model.
Perform a thickness check on a design model.

2015 PTC

Module 3 | Page 1

Analyzing Design Models Theory


Analysis tools enable you to ensure that the design model is
acceptable for mold creation.
Analysis tools include:
Draft check
Section Thickness check
Thickness check
Analysis tools can be used on
components other than the design
model.
Analysis tools can be used at
times other than before the mold
is created.

Figure 1 Draft Check

Figure 2 Section Thickness Check

Analyzing Design Models Theory


You can perform analyses on design models before creating the mold model.
Analysis tools enable you to ensure that the design model is acceptable for
mold creation. You can perform the following types of analyses on design
models:
Draft check
Thickness check
Section Thickness check
You usually use these analysis tools before the mold is created, but you can
also use them at almost any point during the mold process, including:
Parting line creation If the parting line location is modified slightly you can
perform a draft check to verify that the model is still properly drafted.
Parting surface creation Again, if the parting surface is modified you can
perform a draft check to verify that the model is still properly drafted.
Mold component creation You can perform a thickness check on
components other than the design model. You can perform a thickness
check on the core or cavity component to verify that it has sufficient
thickness to handle the stress during the molding part creation.

Module 3 | Page 2

2015 PTC

Performing a Draft Check


You can perform a draft analysis to ultimately determine whether
a model is suitable for a mold operation.
You do not need to be in Mold
mode to perform the analysis.
Draft Check
Specify references:
Surface
Direction
Specify options:
Draft angle
Sample
Quality
Plots:
3-Color
Rainbow

Figure 1 Incorrectly Drafted Pegs

Figure 2 Peg Geometry Updated


for Correct Draft

Figure 3 Rainbow Plot

Performing a Draft Check


You can use draft checking to determine whether the design model has
the correct surfaces drafted and suitable draft angles to facilitate the
mold-opening process as well as the removal of the molding component. To
perform the draft check, click Draft
mode, or click Draft
if in Part mode.

from the Analysis group if in Mold

from the Inspect Geometry group in the Analysis tab

You must specify the following references to perform a draft check:


Surface Specifies the surfaces for which the draft analysis is to be run.
You can select surfaces or quilts individually, or select the part node in the
model tree to select all solid geometry.
Direction Specifies the direction to be used for the draft analysis. Usually,
the pull direction is the direction in which the mold opens. If in a mold
model, the system automatically uses the pull direction by default, but you
can also specify your own direction reference.
You must also specify the following options:
Draft angle Enables you to specify the desired draft angle to check for.
2015 PTC

Module 3 | Page 3

Sample Enables you to specify how the plot resolution is calculated.


Options include Quality, Number, and Step.
Quality Adjusts the quality of the plot.
When you perform a Draft analysis, the system produces a color plot of the
draft angles. Based on the coloring, you can identify areas that do not have
sufficient draft angles, or incorrect direction draft angles. There are two
different types of color plots you can display:
3-Color Plot
Displays a three color plot in the graphics window.
Sufficient positive draft angles appear in blue, sufficient negative draft
angles appear in red, and insufficient angles appear in white.
Rainbow Plot

Displays the color scale as a rainbow plot.

You can specify the number of colors to display, and whether the color scale
is shown as continuous or non-continuous.

Module 3 | Page 4

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Performing a Draft Check


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Draft_Check
Task 1:

DRAFT-CHECK.PRT

Perform a draft check on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. In the ribbon, select the
Applications tab.
3. Click Mold/Cast
from the
Engineering group.

4. Click Draft
group.

from the Analysis

5. Select DRAFT-CHECK.PRT
from the model tree.
6. In the Draft Analysis dialog box,
clear the Use the pull direction
check box.
7. Right-click in the graphics
window and select Direction
Collector.
8. Select datum plane TOP from
the model tree.
9. Edit the draft angle to 3 if
necessary.
10. Rotate the model so that you can
view the pegs underneath.
11. Notice that there is positive draft
on the pegs and it needs to be
negative.

12. In the Draft Analysis dialog box,


click Flip.
13. Notice that the colors and angle
values have reversed.
14. Click OK from the Draft Analysis
dialog box.

2015 PTC

Module 3 | Page 5

15. In the model tree, right-click


Draft 3 and select Edit

16. Edit the draft angle to -3 and


click twice in the background to
finish editing the model.

17. Click Draft

18. Select DRAFT-CHECK.PRT


from the model tree.
19. In the Draft Analysis dialog box,
clear the Use the pull direction
check box.
20. Right-click in the graphics
window and select Direction
Collector.
21. Select datum plane TOP from
the model tree.
22. Notice that the pegs are now
drafted the correct way for
molding.
23. In the Draft Analysis dialog box,
edit the Draft angle to 4
24. In the Color Scale dialog box,
click Expand
.
Edit the number of colors to 3.

25. Click Rainbow Plot

26. Click 3-Color Plot

27. Click OK from the Draft Analysis dialog box.


This completes the procedure.

Module 3 | Page 6

2015 PTC

Performing a Section Thickness Check


You can perform a section thickness check on a part model to
check for maximum or minimum thickness at specified locations.
Two methods:
Select one or more planes.
Select references to create
incremental slices.
Two checks available:
Maximum thickness.
Minimum thickness.
Interface is slightly different in
part model versus manufacturing
model.

Figure 1 Displaying Section


Thickness Cross-Sections Through
Selected Planes

Figure 2 Displaying Section


Thickness Cross-Sections
Through Slices

Performing a Section Thickness Check on a Model


You can perform a thickness check on a model by selecting the Analysis tab
in the ribbon, and then clicking Section Thickness
from the Model Report
group. You can measure thickness using either of the following methods:
Select one or more planes through which the thickness is measured. You
can press CTRL to select multiple planar references.
Select references to create incremental cross-section slices through which
thickness is measured. To create these incremental slices, you must
specify the following references:
From slices This specifies the start point of slicing. You can select
either vertices or datum points for this reference.
To slices This specifies the end point of slicing. Again, you can select
either vertices or datum points for this reference.
Direction This specifies the direction of slicing. If necessary, you can
click the direction arrow in the graphics window to flip the direction of
slicing to point between the From Slices and To Slices references.
Once you have specified the correct slicing references, you can specify
the following options:
2015 PTC

Module 3 | Page 7

Use number of slices This specifies the number of slices to be created


between the selected references.
Offset The incremental offset value that separates each cross-sectional
slice.
The Slices reference collectors become grayed out if you select a
Plane reference to perform the thickness check.
You can configure the system to perform the following two thickness checks
at each specified reference:
Maximum Checks for maximum thickness. The system performs a
maximum thickness check based on the value you have specified.
Minimum Checks for minimum thickness. The system performs a
minimum thickness check based on the value you have specified.
The Thickness dialog box displays the results for each thickness
cross-section location. When you select a result in the dialog box, the
thickness cross-section displays in the graphics window. The Thickness
dialog box also indicates whether the thickness at each cross-section
surpassed the minimum or maximum thicknesses specified.

Performing a Section Thickness Check in a Manufacturing Model


You can also perform a section thickness check in the mold model by clicking
Section Thickness
from the Analysis group in the Mold tab. Because the
section thickness check occurs within the context of an assembly, you must
specify the part that the thickness check is to be performed on.
Once the part is specified, the thickness check is similar to that of the model
analysis thickness check, although the interface is slightly different. You can
either select one or more planes through which to measure the thickness, or
you can have the system create slices based on selected references. The
system can check for both maximum and minimum thickness based on the
specified thickness value you provide, and the results appear in the Model
Analysis dialog box similar to those of the Thickness dialog box.

Module 3 | Page 8

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Performing a Section Thickness Check


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\Section-Thickness_Check
Task 1:

THICKNESS-CHECK.PRT

Perform a thickness check on a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:

2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis


tab.
3. Click the Model Report group
drop-down menu and select
Section Thickness

4. Press CTRL and select datum


planes FRONT, TOP, and
RIGHT.
5. In the Thickness dialog box, edit
the Maximum value to 0.2 and
click Preview.
Notice that the #1 and #2
results have an area of
thickness greater than 0.2.
Select the #2 result, and notice
that it highlights in the graphics
window.
6. In the Thickness dialog box, click
Show All.
Notice that all three results
highlight in the graphics
window.
Click Clear.

2015 PTC

Module 3 | Page 9

7. In the Thickness dialog box,


right-click in the Planes collector
and select Remove All.
Click in the From slices
collector and select datum
point PNT0.
Select datum point PNT1 as
the To slices reference.
Select datum plane RIGHT for
the Direction collector.
Edit the Offset to 2.
Clear the Maximum check
box.
Select the Minimum check
box and edit the value to 0.15.
Click Preview.
8. Click Show All.
9. Click OK from the Thickness
dialog box.

Task 2:

Perform a thickness check in a mold cavity.

1. Click Open
from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click
MFG_THICKNESS.ASM.
2. Click the Analysis group drop-down menu and select Section
Thickness

3. Select the model from the graphics window.

Module 3 | Page 10

2015 PTC

4. In the Model Analysis dialog


box, click Slices for the Setup
Thickness Check.
Select datum point PNT2 as
the Start Point.
Select datum point PNT3 as
the End Point.
Select datum plane
MAIN_PARTING_PLN as
the Slice Direction.
Click Okay from the menu
manager to accept the upward
direction.
Select the Use number of
slices check box and edit the
value to 6 slices.
Edit the Slice Offset to 1.
Clear the Max check box and
select the Min check box,
editing its value to 0.3.
Click Compute.
Click Close.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 3 | Page 11

Performing a Thickness Check


You can perform a 3-D thickness check on a part model to check
for maximum or minimum thickness violations.
Measure:
All solid geometry.
Individually selected surfaces.
Two thickness checks available:
Maximum thickness
Minimum thickness
You can specify:
Minimum/Maximum thickness
values.
Minimum/Maximum thickness
color.
Neutral color.
Post processing.

Figure 1 Viewing Min and Max


Thickness Violations

Figure 2 Viewing Post Processed


Min and Max Thickness Violations

Performing a Thickness Check


You can perform a 3-D thickness check on a part model to check for
maximum or minimum thickness violations. The thickness check reduces the
time to analyze wall thickness of complicated parts.
option is available in multiple places in the Creo
The Thickness
Parametric user interface:
In Part mode:
In the Analysis tab, within the Model Report group.
In Mold mode:
In the Mold tab, within the Analysis group.
In the Analysis tab, within the Model Report group.
In the Analysis tab, within the Mold Analysis group.
In the Measure dialog box, you can measure thickness within all solid
geometry or individually selected surfaces. You can specify the following:
Minimum thickness value Checks for minimum thickness. The system
performs a minimum thickness check based on the value you have
specified. Areas that violate the minimum thickness specified (areas where
the thickness is less than the specified value) highlight in the model in
purple.
Module 3 | Page 12

2015 PTC

Maximum thickness value Checks for maximum thickness. The system


performs a maximum thickness check based on the value you have
specified. Areas that violate the maximum thickness specified (areas where
the thickness is more than the specified value) highlight in the model in red.
Minimum thickness color Specify a different minimum thickness color
than the default purple.
Neutral color Specify a different neutral color than the default gray.
Maximum thickness color Specify a different maximum thickness color
than the default purple.
Tolerance Specify the allowable error for the calculation.
Use post-processing Selecting this check box causes the system to post
process the results to improve quality and accuracy.
Minimum thickness results display in the graphics window within an on-screen
panel. You can drag this panel as well as collapse it. You can restore it by
clicking its on-screen icon.
You can also view minimum thickness results by expanding the Results area
of the Measure dialog box. You can copy and paste the contents of this
Results table to other programs such as spreadsheet applications.
from the
You can save the measurement by clicking Save Analysis
Measure dialog box. Save the measurement as either of the following types:
Feature Enables you to save the measurement as a feature in the model
tree.
Analysis Enables you to save the measurement for future use. You can
specify a unique name for the measurement analysis so you can easily
identify it at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analysis by clicking
Saved Analysis

from the Manage group in the Analysis tab.

Measurement Options
Within the Measure dialog box, you can edit various options by clicking
Measure Options

. The following options are available:

Units by Model Units are the same as those of the model.


Length Units Specify the desired length units from a drop-down list.
Decimal Places Specify the number of decimal places displayed for
measurements.
Show Feature Tab Displays the Feature tab in the Measure dialog box,
enabling you to specify regeneration order as well as create parameters
for a given measurement.
Use automatic compute Automatically computes the new measurement if
different references are selected for measuring.
Panel display You can toggle panels to either hide or display them in
the graphics window. You can also toggle panels by collapsing them or
expanding them.

2015 PTC

Module 3 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Performing a Thickness Check


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Analysis\3-D_Thickness
Task 1:

3-D_THICKNESS.PRT

Perform a thickness check on a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis
tab.
3. Click Thickness
from the
Model Report group.

4. Select the 3-D geometry in the


graphics window.
5. In the Measure dialog box, edit
the Minimum value to 0.18.
Edit the Maximum value to
0.50.
Click Compute.
Drag the panel approximately
as shown.
The areas shaded in purple
is thinner than the minimum
specified value of 0.18. The
areas shaded in red are
thicker than the maximum
specified value of 0.5.
6. In the Measure dialog box, select
the Use post-processing check
box.
Click Compute.
Notice that the accuracy
has improved in terms of
color-coding the model areas
that violate the minimum and
maximum thicknesses.
Click Close.
This completes the procedure.

Module 3 | Page 14

2015 PTC

Module

Mold Models
Module Overview
You start the mold design process by creating a mold model. You assemble
and orient the reference model that represents the design model being
molded. You can also pattern or assemble the reference part multiple times
to create multi-cavity molds.
In this module, you learn how to create mold models and assemble the
reference model into it.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Create new mold models.
Recognize the differences between absolute and relative accuracy.
Locate, assemble, and create the reference model.
Learn the different parts of the reference model that you can redefine.
Explain the differences between the methods for reference model
orientation.
Explain the different types of mold cavity layout and orientation you can use
on the mold model.
Calculate the projected area of the reference model.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 1

Creating New Mold Models


Your company can create customized templates for creating
new mold models.
A mold model consists of:
A reference model
Workpieces
Mold components
Molding
File extension is .asm
Use customized mold
manufacturing templates.
Mold templates include:
Datums
Pull Direction
Layers
Units
Parameters
View Orientations
You can modify pull direction.

Figure 1 New Mold Model Tree

Figure 2 New Mold Model

Creating New Mold Models


A mold model is the model you work on while in Mold Cavity Design mode, or
Mold mode. The mold model, which has a file extension of .asm, contains
the following:

A reference model.
One or more workpieces that represent the overall size of cavity inserts.
Several mold components that represent cavity inserts.
One molding component that represents the product of the molding
process.
The remainder of this course focuses on the creation of these items.

You can create new mold models within Creo Parametric either by using
File > New, or by clicking New
. You can type the name of the mold and
decide whether to use a default template or a template at all. Unless you
select the Empty template, the new mold displays in the graphics window
with some default datum features.

Module 4 | Page 2

2015 PTC

Using Templates
You should create new mold models using a template. Mold templates are
similar to part and assembly templates in that they enable you to create a
new mold with predefined general information. Your company has probably
created customized templates, as they contain your company's standards.
Using a template to create a new mold is beneficial because it means that
regardless of who created it, the mold contains the same consistent set of
information, including:
Datums Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and a
default coordinate system, all named appropriately.
Default Pull Direction The direction in which the mold opens.
Layers When every mold, part, and assembly contains the same layers, it
is easier to manage both the layers and items on the layer.
Units Most companies have a company standard for units in their molds.
Creating every mold with the same set of units ensures that mistakes are
not made.
Parameters Every mold can have the same standard metadata
information.
View Orientations Having every mold contain the same standard view
orientations aids the molding process.

Modifying the Default Pull Direction


The default pull direction is visible on the model as a double set of arrows,
as shown in Figure 2. It is used as a default direction for all mold-specific
features and analysis depending on the pull direction. You can toggle the pull
direction display on and off by clicking Pull Direction Display
from the
In Graphics toolbar. You can also change the direction of the default pull
direction by clicking Pull Direction
from the Design Features group in
the ribbon. The reference you select causes the pull direction to become
perpendicular to that reference. Keep in mind that if you modify the default
pull direction within a mold model created using a template, you should
rename the datum planes appropriately.
The pull direction value is not parametric. This means that features
built before resetting the default pull direction use the earlier
direction value. They are not updated when you reset the default
pull direction. Therefore, it is recommended that you do not modify
the pull direction after a certain point in the mold process.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating New Mold Models


Close Window
Mold\New
Task 1:

Erase Not Displayed


CREATE NEW

Create a new mold model by selecting a template.

1. Click New
from the Quick Access toolbar.
Select Manufacturing as the Type and Mold cavity as the
Sub-type.
Edit the Name to NEW_MOLD.
Clear the Use default template check box.
Click OK.
2. In the New File Options dialog
box, click Browse.
Double-click MMNS_MFG_
MOLD.ASM.
Click OK.
3. Enable only the following Datum
Display types:

4. Notice that an assembly of the


same name as the mold cavity is
created in the model tree.
5. Explore the default datum
features created in the graphics
window and model tree.
6. Notice the PULL DIRECTION.

7. Click Pull Direction Display


from the In Graphics toolbar to
disable the pull direction display.
8. Click Pull Direction Display
again to toggle it back on.

Module 4 | Page 4

2015 PTC

9. In the model tree, click Show


and select Layer Tree. Notice
the default layers.
10. Click Show
Tree.

and select Model

11. Click File > Prepare > Model


Properties to access the Model
Properties dialog box.
12. In the Materials section, click
change in the Units row. Notice
the units that are set.
13. Click Close > Close.
14. Click Saved Orientations
from the In Graphics
toolbar. Notice the default view
orientations.
15. Select view orientation FRONT.
16. Notice that the PULL
DIRECTION for the mold
points upward from the parting
plane.
17. Click Saved Orientations
and select Standard
Orientation.
18. Click Pull Direction
from the
Design Features group in the
ribbon.
19. Select datum plane
MOLD_FRONT and click
OK from the Pull Direction dialog
box.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 5

Task 2:

Create a new mold model by selecting a different template.

1. Click New
.
Select Manufacturing as the
Type and Mold cavity as the
Sub-type.
Edit the Name to
NEW_MOLD_ENGLISH.
Clear the Use default
template check box.
Click OK.
2. In the New File Options dialog
box, select the inlbs_mfg_mold
template.
Click OK.
3. Again, notice the datum features
and PULL DIRECTION.
4. Click File > Prepare > Model
Properties.
5. In the Materials section, click
change in the Units row. Notice
the units that are set.
6. Click Close > Close.

This completes the procedure.

Module 4 | Page 6

2015 PTC

Analyzing Model Accuracy


One of the most important factors affecting the mold design
process is model accuracy.
Types of accuracy:
Relative
Absolute
Automatically controlling
accuracy in mold model
Implications of changing
accuracy
When does accuracy need to
be changed?

Figure 1 Confirmation for


Automatically Changing Accuracy

Figure 2 Viewing an Accuracy


Conflict

Analyzing Model Accuracy


One of the most important factors affecting the mold design process is model
accuracy. Creo Parametric provides the following types of accuracy settings:
Relative This type of accuracy is specified as a fraction of the longest
diagonal of the bounding box of a model. The default relative accuracy is
0.0012.
Absolute This type of accuracy improves the matching of models of
different sizes or different accuracies (for example, imported models
created on another system). To avoid potential problems when adding new
features to a model, it is recommended that you set the reference model to
absolute accuracy before adding additional parts to the model. Absolute
accuracy is useful when you are doing the following:
Copying geometry from one mold to another during core operations.
Designing models for manufacturing and mold design.
Matching accuracy of imported geometry to its destination model.
You can match the accuracies of a set of models in one of the two following
ways:
Give them all the same absolute accuracies.
Designate the smallest model as the base model, and assign its accuracy
to the other models.

Automatically Controlling Accuracy


You can perform the following steps to automatically set the correct accuracy
when creating mold models:
Set the configuration file option enable_absolute_accuracy to yes.
Create a new mold model. It receives a default (absolute) accuracy value.
2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 7

Add the first reference model. If a discrepancy exists between the


assembly model accuracy and reference model accuracy, the system
issues a warning and prompts you to confirm changing the assembly
model accuracy, as shown in Figure 1. If you accept, then Creo Parametric
switches the assembly model accuracy from relative to absolute, and sets
it to the value corresponding to the accuracy of the reference model. If you
do not accept, the system warns you that there is an accuracy conflict, and
generates a text file with a *.acc file extension in the working directory.
Create the mold workpiece using the automatic workpiece creation
functionality. The accuracy of the workpiece is automatically set to be the
same as the accuracy of the assembly model.

Implications and Guidelines of Changing Accuracy


When you change the accuracy of a model you are changing the
computational accuracy of geometry calculations. The accuracy of a mold
model is relative to the size of the resultant molding component. The valid
range for accuracy is 0.01 to 0.0001, and the default value is 0.0012.
However, the configuration file option, accuracy_lower_bound, can override
the lower boundary of this range. The specified values for the lower boundary
must be between 0.000001 and 0.0001.
If you increase the accuracy, the regeneration time also increases. Use the
default accuracy unless you need to increase it. In general, you should set the
accuracy to a value less than half the ratio of the length of the smallest edge
on the model to the length of the largest diagonal of a box that would contain
the model. Use the default accuracy until you have a reason not to do so.

Situations for Changing Accuracy


The following are situations that may cause you to have to change accuracy:
Placing a small feature on a model.
Intersecting two models of very different size. For the two models to be
compatible, they must have the same absolute accuracy. To achieve this,
estimate each model size, and multiply each by its respective current
accuracy. If the results differ, enter a value for the accuracy of the models
that yields the same results for each. You might need to increase the mold
accuracy of the larger model by entering a smaller decimal number. For
example, if the size of the smaller model is 100 and the accuracy is .01,
the product of these numbers is 1. If the size of the larger model is 1000
and the accuracy is .01, the product of these numbers is 10. Change the
accuracy of the larger model to .001 to yield the same product.
When an accuracy conflict exists, the system warns you in the Message Log
and generate a *.acc file that is saved in the working directory. You can view
this text file to determine where the conflict exists and modify the accuracies
accordingly. The contents of an accuracy file are shown in Figure 2.

Module 4 | Page 8

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Model Accuracy


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Accuracy
Task 1:

MFG_ACCURACY.ASM

Modify the accuracy of models in a mold model.


The purpose of this procedure is to show you how to change
accuracy manually. If you specify the reference part and use
automatic workpiece creation during the mold process, you are
automatically prompted to change accuracy.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Notice the warning in the Message Log stating that there is an
accuracy conflict.

3. Click Folder Browser


from
the Navigator and click Working
Directory
.
Click in the right, empty portion
of the address bar to highlight
its contents.
Press END, type
mfg_accuracy.acc, and
press ENTER.
4. Review the accuracy conflict
report for the manufacturing
assembly.
5. Click Show Browser
collapse the browser.
6. Select Model Tree

to

from the Navigator.

7. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category.
Click Add.
Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field.
Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK > No.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 9

8. Click File > Prepare > Model


Properties to access the Model
Properties dialog box.
9. In the Materials section, click
change in the Accuracy row.
10. In the Accuracy dialog box,
select Copying value from
model and click Browse.
11. Double-click MFG_
ACCURACY_REF.PRT from the
Open dialog box.
12. Click Regenerate from the
Accuracy dialog box.
13. Notice that the accuracy has
been changed to Absolute
0.0046.
14. Click Close from the Model
Properties dialog box.
15. Right-click ACCURACY_WRK.PRT and select Open

16. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties.


17. In the Materials section, click change in the Accuracy row.
18. In the Accuracy dialog box,
select Copying value from
model and click Browse.
19. Double-click MFG_
ACCURACY_REF.PRT from the
Open dialog box.
20. Click Regenerate.
21. Notice that the accuracy has
been changed to Absolute
0.0046.
22. Click Close from the Model
Properties dialog box.
23. Click Close
from the Quick Access toolbar to return to
MFG_ACCURACY.ASM.
24. Click Save

from the Quick Access toolbar.

25. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Current, then click Select All
and OK to erase the model from memory.

Module 4 | Page 10

2015 PTC

26. Click Working Directory


and double-click
MFG_ACCURACY.ASM to
open it.
27. Notice that there is no longer an
accuracy conflict in the Message
Log. All components in the mold
manufacturing model are set
to the same absolute accuracy
value.

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 11

Locating the Reference Model


The reference model usually represents the part that is to be
molded.
Locate Reference Model:
Most versatile of the three
methods available.
Specify a pre-defined Layout.
Specify a pre-defined
Orientation.
Matches accuracy if absolute
accuracy is enabled.
You can specify the Reference
model type.

Figure 1 Reference Model


Located into Mold Model

Figure 2 Model Trees for Merge by Reference, Same Model,


and Inherited Reference Model Types

Reference Model Background


The first component you typically assemble in the mold model is the reference
model. The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded.
The reference model is needed to imprint corresponding geometry on mold
components. The geometry imprinted into the mold components becomes
the mold cavity.
The reference model geometry for a mold model is derived from the
corresponding design model geometry. The design model may not always
contain all necessary design elements such as drafts, fillets, and shrinkage
that are required for the mold design process. Sometimes the design model
contains design elements that require post-molding machining. These
elements should be changed on the reference model to suit the mold design
process.

Module 4 | Page 12

2015 PTC

Locating the Reference Model


Locating the reference model is one of three methods available for inserting
the reference model into the mold model, and is the most versatile of the
three. The reference model icon that displays in the model tree is different
than that of a conventional part model, regardless of the method used to
insert it.
to assemble a pre-existing model
You can use Locate Reference Model
as the reference model into the mold model. This option enables you to
further select a pre-defined Layout and Orientation for the reference model.
When locating the reference model, you can specify the Reference model
type:
Merge by reference Creo Parametric copies design model geometry
into the reference model using an External Merge feature. Only the
geometry, datum planes, and layers are copied from the design model.
If a layer with one or more datum planes associated with it exists in
a design model, the layer, its name, display status, and the datum
planes are copied from the design model to the reference model. Any
changes made to the reference model do NOT affect the original design
model. The default name for the new reference model created with
this method is <MOLD_MODEL_NAME>_REF.PRT. For example, if
the mold model is CAMERA_MOLD.PRT, the new reference model is
CAMERA_MOLD_REF.PRT. Any changes made to the original design
model automatically propagate to the reference model.
Same model Creo Parametric uses the design model as the reference
model. The reference model is the design model. Therefore, any changes
made to this reference model do affect the design model, as you are
actually modifying the original design model. As a result, you cannot
rename this reference model when it is the same model as the original
design model.
Inherited The reference model inherits all geometry and feature
information from the design model using an External Inheritance feature.
You can specify the geometry and the feature data that you want to modify
on the inherited reference model without changing the original design
model. Inheritance provides greater freedom to modify the reference model
without changing the design model. Any changes made to the reference
model do not affect the design model. Similar to the Merge by Reference
method, the default name for the new reference model created with this
method is <MOLD_MODEL_NAME>_REF.PRT. Again, any changes made
to the original design model automatically propagate to the reference
model.
If you have absolute accuracy enabled, the system prompts you to confirm
the accuracy change that needs to occur to properly match the mold model
accuracy to the reference model accuracy.
When the reference model is located into the mold model, the resulting
geometry in the graphics window looks the same, regardless of the method
used to create the reference model. You must expand the model tree to
determine the method used.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Locating the Reference Model


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Reference-Model_Locate
Task 1:

REF-MODEL_MERGE.ASM

Locate the reference model as a merge model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category.
Click Add.
Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field.
Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK.
3. In the ribbon, select Locate
Reference Model
from
the Reference Model types
drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
group.
4. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from
the Open dialog box.
5. In the Create Reference Model
dialog box, select Merge by
reference as the Reference
model type.
Notice the Design model.
Edit the Reference model
Name to BUTTON_REF and
click OK.
6. Click OK from the Layout dialog
box.
7. Click OK from the Warning dialog
box to change the accuracy.
8. Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.
9. Click Regenerate
from the
Quick Access toolbar.
10. Expand BUTTON_REF.PRT in
the model tree.
11. Notice that the reference model
only contains an external merge
feature.

Module 4 | Page 14

2015 PTC

Task 2:

Locate the reference model as the same model.

1. Click Open
from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click
REF-MODEL_SAME.ASM.
2. Click Locate Reference Model

3. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from the Open dialog box.


4. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Same model as
the Reference model type.
Notice the Reference model Name, and that the field is grayed out.
Click OK.
5. Click OK from the Layout dialog
box.
6. Click OK from the Warning dialog
box.
7. Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.
8. Click Regenerate

9. Expand BUTTON.PRT in the model tree.


10. Notice that the reference model is the original model.
Task 3:

Locate the reference model as an inheritance.

1. Click Open

and double-click REF-MODEL_INHERITED.ASM.

2. Click Locate Reference Model

3. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from the Open dialog box.


4. In the Create Reference Model dialog box, select Inherited as the
Reference model type.
Edit the Reference model Name to BUTTON_REF_I and click OK.
5. Click OK from the Layout dialog
box.
6. Click OK from the Warning dialog
box.
7. Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.
8. Click Regenerate

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 15

9. Expand BUTTON_REF_I.PRT in
the model tree.
10. Notice that the reference model
only contains an external
inheritance feature.
This completes the procedure.

Module 4 | Page 16

2015 PTC

Assembling the Reference Model


The reference model usually represents the part that is to be
molded.
Assemble Reference Model:
Uses a previously created
model.
Uses conventional assembly
placement constraints.
Matches accuracy if absolute
accuracy is enabled.
You can specify the Reference
model type.

Figure 1 Viewing the Reference


Model in the Model Tree

Figure 2 Assembling the Reference


Model using Constraints

Figure 3 Viewing the Assembled


Reference Model

Reference Model Background


The first component you typically assemble in the mold model is the reference
model. The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded.
The reference model is needed to imprint corresponding geometry on mold
components. The geometry imprinted into the mold components becomes
the mold cavity.
The reference model geometry for a mold model is derived from the
corresponding design model geometry. The design model may not always
contain all necessary design elements such as drafts, fillets, and shrinkage
that are required for the mold design process. Sometimes the design model
contains design elements that require post-molding machining. These
elements should be changed on the reference model to suit the mold design
process.

Assembling the Reference Model


Assembling the reference model is one of three methods available for
inserting the reference model into the mold model. The reference model icon
that displays in the model tree is different than that of a conventional part
model, regardless of the method used to insert it.
2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 17

You can use Assemble Reference Model


to assemble a pre-existing
model as the reference model into the mold model. This option enables you
to use conventional Assembly mode placement constraints to assemble the
reference model. Unlike the Locate Reference Model option, you cannot
further specify a Layout and Orientation.
You can redefine the reference model, however, to specify a Layout
and Orientation.
Similar to the Locate Reference Model option, you can specify the Reference
model type:
Merge by reference Creo Parametric copies design model geometry
into the reference model using an External Merge feature. Only the
geometry, datum planes, and layers are copied from the design model.
If a layer with one or more datum planes associated with it exists in
a design model, the layer, its name, display status, and the datum
planes are copied from the design model to the reference model. Any
changes made to the reference model do NOT affect the original design
model. The default name for the new reference model created with
this method is <MOLD_MODEL_NAME>_REF.PRT. For example, if
the mold model is CAMERA_MOLD.PRT, the new reference model is
CAMERA_MOLD_REF.PRT. Any changes made to the original design
model automatically propagate to the reference model.
Same model Creo Parametric uses the design model as the reference
model. The reference model is the design model. Therefore, any changes
made to this reference model do affect the design model, as you are
actually modifying the original design model. As a result, you cannot
rename this reference model when it is the same model as the original
design model.
Inherited The reference model inherits all geometry and feature
information from the design model using an External Inheritance feature.
You can specify the geometry and the feature data that you want to modify
on the inherited reference model without changing the original design
model. Inheritance provides greater freedom to modify the reference model
without changing the design model. Any changes made to the reference
model do not affect the design model. Similar to the Merge by Reference
method, the default name for the new reference model created with this
method is <MOLD_MODEL_NAME>_REF.PRT. Again, any changes made
to the original design model automatically propagate to the reference
model.
If you have absolute accuracy enabled, the system prompts you to confirm
the accuracy change that needs to occur to properly match the mold model
accuracy to the reference model accuracy.
When the reference model is assembled into the mold model, the resulting
geometry in the graphics window looks the same, regardless of the method
used to create the reference model. You must expand the model tree to
determine the method used.

Module 4 | Page 18

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Assembling the Reference Model


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Reference-Model_Assemble
REF-MODEL_ASSEMBLE.ASM
Task 1:

Assemble the reference model using placement constraints.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:


2. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category.
Click Add.
Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field.
Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK.
3. In the ribbon, select Assemble
Reference Model
from
the Reference Model types
drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
group.
4. Double-click BUTTON.PRT from
the Open dialog box.
5. Notice that you can now
assemble the reference model
using conventional placement
constraints.
6. In the graphics window,
select coordinate system
MOLD_DEF_CSYS as the
assembly reference.
Select coordinate system
PRT_CSYS_DEF as the
component reference.
7. Click Complete Component
from the dashboard.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 19

8. In the Create Reference Model


dialog box, select Merge by
reference as the Reference
model type.
Edit the Reference model
Name to BUTTON_REF and
click OK.
9. Click OK from the Warning dialog
box to edit the accuracy.

This completes the procedure.

Module 4 | Page 20

2015 PTC

Creating the Reference Model


The reference model usually represents the part that is to be
molded.
Create Reference Model:
Creates a new model on-the-fly.
Uses conventional component
creation methods.
Uses conventional assembly
placement constraints.
You cannot specify the Reference
model type.

Figure 2 Assembling the Reference


Model using Constraints

Figure 1 Viewing the Reference


Model in the Model Tree

Figure 3 Reference Model


Created from Empty Template

Reference Model Background


The first component you typically assemble in the mold model is the reference
model. The reference model usually represents the part that is to be molded.
The reference model is needed to imprint corresponding geometry on mold
components. The geometry imprinted into the mold components becomes
the mold cavity.
The reference model geometry for a mold model is derived from the
corresponding design model geometry. The design model may not always
contain all necessary design elements such as drafts, fillets, and shrinkage
that are required for the mold design process. Sometimes the design model
contains design elements that require post-molding machining. These
elements should be changed on the reference model to suit the mold design
process.

Creating the Reference Model


Creating the reference model is one of three methods available for inserting
the reference model into the mold model and offers the least flexibility. The
2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 21

reference model icon that displays in the model tree is different than that of a
conventional part model, regardless of the method used to insert it.
to create a new model on-the-fly
You can use Create Reference Model
and assemble it as the reference model into the mold model using
conventional Assembly mode placement constraints. This option is similar
to creating a new component in Assembly mode. In fact, the same creation
options are available:
Copy from existing Creates a copy of an existing model. This could be an
existing design model or an empty template of your company standards.
Locate default datums Creates the model and enables you to locate
the default datums in the assembly.
Empty Creates the model without geometry or datum features.
Create features Creates the model using existing assembly references.
With this method you cannot specify the Reference model type. There are
also no pre-defined options available for Layout or Orientation, and there are
no further locating options or accuracy matching.

Module 4 | Page 22

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating the Reference Model


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Reference-Model_Create
Task 1:

BUTTON.PRT

Create the reference model from an existing design model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:

2. Notice the model geometry.


3. Click Close
from the Quick
Access toolbar.

4. Click File > Options and select the Configuration Editor category.
Click Add.
Type enable_absolute_accuracy in the Option name field.
Select yes as the Option value and click OK > OK.
5. Click Open
from the Quick
Access toolbar and double-click
REF-MODEL_COPY-FROM.
ASM.
6. In the ribbon, select Create
Reference Model
from
the Reference Model types
drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
group.
7. In the Component Create
dialog box, edit the Name to
BUTTON_REF.
Click OK.
8. In the Creation Options dialog box, select Copy from existing as
the Creation Method.
Click Browse.
Double-click BUTTON.PRT.
Click OK.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 23

9. Notice that you can now


assemble the reference model
using conventional placement
constraints.
10. Notice that the geometry was
copied from the BUTTON.PRT
model.
11. Enable Csys Display

12. In the graphics window,


select coordinate system
MOLD_DEF_CSYS as the
assembly reference.
Select coordinate system
PRT_CSYS_DEF as the
component reference.
13. Click Complete Component
from the dashboard.
Task 2:

Create the reference model from an empty template.

1. Click Open
and double-click
REF-MODEL_CREATE.ASM.
2. Select Create Reference Model
from the Reference Model
types drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
group.
3. In the Component Create
dialog box, edit the name to
BUTTON_REF_NEW.
Click OK.
4. In the Creation Options dialog box, select Copy from existing as
the Creation Method.
Click Browse.
Double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.
Click OK.

Module 4 | Page 24

2015 PTC

5. Notice that you can now


assemble the reference model
using conventional placement
constraints.
6. Right-click in the graphics
window and select Default
Constraint.

7. Click Complete Component

You could now activate the reference model and create geometry
as desired.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 25

Redefining the Reference Model


You can redefine certain items related to the reference model
once it is placed within the mold model.
You can redefine the following
reference model related items:
Reference model orientation.
Mold cavity layout.
Mold cavity layout orientation.
You cannot change the reference
model to a different reference
model.
Switching reference model
methods:
Inherited and Merge by
Reference only.
You cannot switch between
Same Model and another
method.

Figure 1 Layout Dialog Box when


Redefining Reference Model

Redefining the Reference Model


You can redefine the reference model by selecting Locate Reference Model
from the Reference Model types drop-down menu in the Reference Model
& Workpiece group and then clicking Redefine from the menu manager. You
can redefine the following items related to the reference model:
Reference model orientation You can adjust the reference model origin
and orientation within the mold model. You can do this by either adjusting
the reference model coordinate system or the mold model's coordinate
system.
Mold cavity layout You can adjust the quantity and layout of the mold
cavities created within the mold model.
Mold cavity layout orientation You can adjust the orientation of the mold
cavities created within the mold model.
You cannot change the current reference model to a different
reference model.
You can perform these functions on reference models that were
located or assembled, but not reference models that were directly
created in the mold model.
Module 4 | Page 26

2015 PTC

Switching Reference Model Methods


If you have located or assembled the reference model using the Same Model
method, you cannot redefine the method to switch it to Merge by reference or
Inherited. Conversely, if you located or assembled the reference model using
either Merge by reference or Inherited, you cannot redefine the method to
Same Model. In either of these cases you must delete the reference model
from the mold model and recreate it.
You can switch the reference model creation method back and forth between
Merge by reference and Inheritance, however. You can do this by editing the
definition of the External Merge or External Inheritance feature within the
reference model, depending on the type of creation method used. You can
then toggle the inheritance on or off in the dashboard. Keep in mind that
in switching back and forth you will lose any geometry that was varied in
the inheritance feature, and the resulting geometry may change, potentially
causing other geometry to fail.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 27

Analyzing Reference Model Orientation


You can modify the orientation of the reference model in the
mold model.
The system lines up
coordinate systems from
the reference model and
mold model.
Modify reference model
orientation:
Standard
Select a coordinate
system.
Dynamic
Modify orientation of
REF_ORIGIN.
Other dynamic options:
Projected area
Draft check
Bounding box
information

Figure 1 Using Standard Orientation

Figure 2 Using Dynamic Orientation

Analyzing Reference Model Orientation


You can modify the orientation of the reference model in the mold model.
When you select the reference model to be added to the mold model, the
system selects a coordinate system from the reference model and assembles
it to a coordinate system from the mold model.

Modifying the Reference Model Orientation


You can modify the reference model orientation within the mold model either
by specifying a different mold layout coordinate system or by specifying a
different reference model coordinate system.
There are two different methods that you can use to specify a different
coordinate system in the reference model:
Standard Enables you to select a different, existing, coordinate system in
the reference model. A separate window opens that contains the reference
model, enabling you to select the coordinate system, as shown in Figure 1.
Dynamic A separate window opens that contains the reference model.
However, a new coordinate system called REF_ORIGIN is created in the
reference model, and you can dynamically reorient this coordinate system
so that it will line up properly with the mold layout coordinate system.
In the separate window that contains the reference model, the X, Y, and
Z-directions of the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system are displayed, and
the positive Z-direction is the same as the PULL DIRECTION in the
mold model. Also, the Parting Plane displays to show you a surface
Module 4 | Page 28

2015 PTC

perpendicular to the pull direction. Figure 2 shows the REF_ORIGIN


coordinate system orientation and Parting Plane and the resulting
orientation in the mold model.
You can dynamically adjust the coordinate system orientation in the
reference model window, and the parting plane also adjusts dynamically.
The following options are available for adjusting the REF_ORIGIN
coordinate system orientation:
Rotate Enables you to rotate the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system
about the X, Y, and Z axes, either by typing a value or by dragging
a slider.
Translate Enables you to translate the REF_ORIGIN coordinate
system in the X, Y, and Z directions, either by typing a value or by
dragging a slider. You can also click Midpoint to automatically translate
the parting plane to a midpoint of the model in that direction.
Move to a point Enables you to move the REF_ORIGIN coordinate
system origin to a specified point in the reference model. There are
two options available:
Selection Enables you to select a vertex, datum point, or other
coordinate system as the new coordinate system origin.
Model center Moves the coordinate system origin to the model
center.
Align an axis Enables you to align the X, Y, or Z Axis of the
REF_ORIGIN coordinate system to a specified datum plane, curve,
edge, axis, or other coordinate system.

Reference Model Dynamic Orientation Options


When you are dynamically reorienting the REF_ORIGIN coordinate system,
the following additional options are available within the Reference Model
Orientation dialog box:
Projected area Determines the area projected onto the Parting Plane as
defined by current orientation of the reference model in the mold model.
The Projected Area is calculated based on the current orientation after
Update is clicked.
Undo/Redo Enables you to undo or redo the last action performed.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 29

Draft check Enables a draft angle to be


specified and performs a draft check on
the reference model's current orientation by
clicking Shade. This shades the model like a
conventional draft check with the three colors
blue, magenta, and yellow.

Figure 3 Draft Check


Bounding box information Provides positive
and negative distances from the model origin
to the edges of the bounding box. This
information updates as the part is moved and
cannot be edited.

Module 4 | Page 30

Figure 4 Bounding
Box Information

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Reference Model Orientation


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Reference-Model_Orientation
Task 1:

REF-ORIENT.ASM

Orient the reference model using dynamic orientation.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:
2. The model is not in proper
orientation with respect to the
PULL DIRECTION.
3. Select Locate Reference Model
from the Reference Model
types drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
group.
4. Click Redefine from the menu
manager.
5. Click Reference Model Origin
from the Layout dialog box.
6. Click Dynamic from the menu
manager.
7. Notice the Parting Plane and the
positive Z-direction.

8. In the Reference Model


Orientation dialog box, verify that
Rotate is specified for the X Axis.
Drag the slider to the right until
about 90, then edit the Value
to 90 and press ENTER.
Notice the Parting Plane and
the positive Z-direction.
Click OK.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 31

9. Click Preview.
10. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
11. Enable Plane Tag Display

12. Select the Mold tab.


13. Notice that the orientation
is now correct for the PULL
DIRECTION, but that the
MAIN_PARTING_PLN is on the
top of the model.
14. Click Reference Model Origin
from the Layout dialog box.
15. Click Dynamic from the menu
manager.
16. In the Reference Model
Orientation dialog box, select
Translate and select the Z Axis.
Drag the slider all the way to
the left so the Value is -7.00
and notice the Parting Plane.
Click OK.
17. Click Preview from the Layout
dialog box.
18. Notice that the MAIN_PARTING_
PLN is now on the bottom.
19. Click OK from the Layout dialog
box and Done/Return from the
menu manager.
Task 2:

Orient the reference model using standard orientation.

1. In the model tree, expand REF-MODEL.PRT.


2. At the top of the model tree, click Settings

and select Tree Filters

.
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed objects
check box and click OK.
4. Right-click STD_CSYS and select Resume.

Module 4 | Page 32

2015 PTC

5. Click Locate Reference Model


and click Redefine from the
menu manager.
6. Click Reference Model Origin
from the Layout dialog box.
7. Verify that the coordinate system
type is Standard in the menu
manager.
8. Select coordinate system
STD_CSYS.
9. Click OK from the Layout dialog
box.
10. Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.
11. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
12. Disable Plane Tag Display

13. Select the Mold tab.


This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 33

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout


You can create a mold model that contains multiple cavities.
The following mold cavity layout
options are available:
Single
Rectangular
Circular
Variable

Figure 1 Single Cavity Mold


Model Layout

Figure 2 Rectangular Cavity


Mold Model Layout

Figure 3 Circular Cavity


Mold Model Layout

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout


You can create a mold model that contains multiple cavities. When you create
a multiple-cavity layout in the mold model, the system creates a pattern of
the reference model to create the multiple cavities.
The following layout options are available:
Single Places a single cavity, or single instance, of the reference model
in the mold model. A Single cavity layout is shown in Figure 1.
Rectangular Places the reference model in a rectangular layout in the
mold model. A Rectangular cavity layout is shown in Figure 2. The
following options are available for the Rectangular layout:
Cavities Specifies the number of cavities, or number of pattern
instances of the reference model, in the X and Y directions. You can
either edit the number or use the up and down arrows to increase or
decrease the number of cavities in each direction.
Increment Specifies the distance between origins of reference models
in the X and Y directions.
The X and Y directions are determined by the mold model coordinate
system's X and Y axes.
Module 4 | Page 34

2015 PTC

Circular Places the reference model in a circular layout in the mold


model. A Circular cavity layout is shown in Figure 3. The following options
are available for the Circular layout:
Cavities Specifies the number of cavities, or number of pattern
instances of the reference model, in the mold model.
Radius Specifies the radius value around which the cavities are placed.
Start Angle Specifies the angular distance in degrees about the mold
model's Z-axis that the first reference model's origin is placed. You can
specify a negative value.
Increment Specifies the angular distance between cavities in degrees.
Variable Enables you to place the reference model according to a
user-defined pattern table.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 35

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout


Close Window
Mold\Cavity-Layout
Task 1:

Erase Not Displayed


CAVITY-LAYOUT.ASM

Analyze mold cavity layout in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:
2. Notice that the mold model is a
single cavity mold.

3. Select Locate Reference Model


from the Reference Model
types drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
group.
4. Click Redefine from the menu
manager.
5. Notice that the current Layout
specified is Single.
6. Select Rectangular as the
Layout.
Edit the X Cavity to 3.
Edit the Y Cavity to 3.
Edit the X Increment to 30.
Edit the Y Increment to 30.
7. Click Preview.
8. In the model tree, expand the
Pattern feature.
9. Notice that there are 9 pattern
members total.
10. These pattern members
correspond with the number
of cavities in the mold model.

Module 4 | Page 36

2015 PTC

11. In the Layout dialog box, edit the


X and Y Increments to 50.
Click Preview.

12. In the Layout dialog box, edit the


number of Y Cavities to 2.
Click Preview.

13. In the Layout dialog box, select


Circular as the Layout.
Edit the number of Cavities to
4.
Edit the Radius to 40 and click
Preview.

14. Edit the Start Angle to 30 and


click Preview.
15. Notice that all four mold cavities
rotated 30 degrees about the
Z-axis.

16. Edit the Start Angle back to 0.


17. Edit the Increment to 60 and click
OK from the Layout dialog box.
18. Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 37

Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout


You can create unique cavity layouts using the Variable layout
option.
Convert an existing layout to
Variable.
The following orientation
options are available:
Reference Rotation
X-Translation
Y-Translation
Layout Rotation
Additional options:
Highlight
Add/Remove pattern
instance

Figure 1 Variable Cavity Converted


from Circular Layout

Figure 2 Variable Cavity Converted


from Single Layout

Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout


You can create unique cavity layouts using the Variable layout option. When
you select the Variable option, the existing cavity layout is converted to the
Variable format, and the Variable table appears in the Layout dialog box.
Each pattern instance (reference model) displays in the left-most column,
and the variables that vary orientation are displayed in the right columns, as
shown in the figures. At this point, you can adjust the orientation for each
pattern member independently of the others.
The following orientation options are available for each pattern instance in
the Variable table:
Reference Rotation
instance) about its origin.

Rotates the reference model (pattern

X-Translation
or negative X-axis.

Translates the reference model along its positive

Y-Translation
or negative Y-axis.

Translates the reference model along its positive

Module 4 | Page 38

2015 PTC

Layout Rotation
origin.

Rotates reference model about mold layout

Of these four options, the Y-Translation and Layout Rotation options are not
always available, depending upon which layout was converted to Variable.
The Layout Rotation option is only available for a layout converted from
Circular, as shown in Figure 1. The Y-Translation option is only available for
a layout converted from Single or Rectangular, as shown in Figure 2.
Additional Variable cavity layout options include the following:
Highlight When this check box is selected, any pattern instance selected
in the Variable table highlights in the graphics window.
Add Enables you to add a new pattern instance to the layout. The new
pattern instance member is inserted immediately following the pattern
instance that is selected when the Add button is clicked.
Remove Enables you to remove an existing pattern instance from the
layout. To remove a pattern instance, select it in the Variable table and
click Remove.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 39

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Variable Mold Cavity Layout


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Cavity-Layout_Variable
Task 1:

VARIABLE-LAYOUT.ASM

Create a variable cavity layout.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:

2. Select Locate Reference Model


from the Reference Model
types drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
group and click Redefine from
the menu manager.
3. Notice that the Layout is a Single
cavity.
4. In the Layout dialog box, select
Variable as the Layout.
Notice the new Variable table.
Select the Highlight check
box.
Select VARIABLE-LAYOUT_
REF and notice that it
highlights in the graphics
window.
5. In the Variable table, edit the
Reference Rotation
to
90.
Edit the X-Translation
to -40.
Edit the Y-Translation
to -40 and click Preview.
6. In the Layout dialog box, click
Add.
Edit the Reference Rotation
to -90.
Edit the X-Translation
to -40.
Edit the Y-Translation
to 40 and click Preview.

Module 4 | Page 40

2015 PTC

7. In the Variable table, select the


second pattern instance and
click Add.
Edit the Reference Rotation
to -90.
Edit the X-Translation
to 50.
Edit the Y-Translation
to -40 and click Preview.
8. In the Variable table, select the
third pattern instance and click
Add.
Edit the Reference Rotation
to 90.
Edit the X-Translation
to -50.
Edit the Y-Translation
to -40 and click Preview.
Task 2:

Modify the variable cavity layout to a different layout.

1. In the Layout dialog box, select Circular as the Layout, edit the
Radius to 60, and click Preview.
2. Select Variable as the Layout.
3. In the Variable table, select the
first pattern instance and edit the
Reference Rotation
to
-90, the X-Translation
to 60, and the Layout Rotation
to 0.
4. Edit the remaining pattern
instance orientation values, as
shown in the table.
5. Click OK from the Layout dialog
box.
6. Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 41

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation


You can adjust the orientation of the cavities in a multi-cavity
layout.
Available orientations for
the following cavity layouts:
Single
Specify a different
coordinate system
Rectangular
Constant
X-Symmetric
Y-Symmetric
Circular
Constant
Radial

Figure 1 Rectangular Layout,


X-Symmetric versus Y-Symmetric
Orientation

Figure 2 Circular Layout, Constant


versus Radial Orientation

Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation


You can adjust the orientation of the cavities in a multi-cavity layout. Examples
of reasons why cavity adjustment may be necessary include the following:
More optimum layout for sprue and runner placement is required.
More uniform cooling of parts is needed.
Manufacturing feasibility of the mold design layout.
Consider each of the mold cavity layouts and their respective options for
orientation.

Modifying Layout Orientation in a Single Cavity


Because there is only a single cavity, no further orientation adjustments are
available. The Orientation options become grayed out in the Layout dialog
box. Rather, you can adjust the cavity orientation in the layout by switching
coordinate systems or dynamically adjusting the REF_ORIGIN coordinate
system.

Modifying Layout Orientation in a Rectangular Cavity


The following Orientation options are available for the Rectangular cavity
layout:
Constant Cavities are arranged to all point in the same direction.
X-Symmetric Cavities are mirrored about the mold model's X-axis. That
is, the cavities are arranged so that they appear in the same orientation
Module 4 | Page 42

2015 PTC

when looking out from a plane that runs along the mold model's X-axis.
X-Symmetric orientation is shown in the left image of Figure 1.
Y-Symmetric Cavities are mirrored about the mold model's Y-axis. That
is, the cavities are arranged so that they appear in the same orientation
when looking out from a plane that runs along the mold model's Y-axis.
Y-Symmetric orientation is shown in the right image of Figure 1.

Modifying Layout Orientation in a Circular Cavity


The following Orientation options are available for the Circular cavity layout:
Constant Cavities are arranged to all point in the same direction, as
shown in the left image of Figure 2.
Radial Cavities are fanned about the mold model's origin. That is, the
cavities are arranged so that they appear in the same orientation when
looking out radially from the mold model origin. Radial orientation is shown
in the right image of Figure 2.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 43

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Mold Cavity Layout Orientation


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Cavity-Layout_Orientation
Task 1:

LAYOUT-ORIENT.ASM

Analyze mold cavity layout orientation in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:
2. Select Locate Reference Model
from the Reference Model
types drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
group.
3. Click Redefine from the menu
manager.
4. In the Layout dialog box, notice
that the Layout is specified as
Rectangular.
Notice that the Orientation is
specified as Constant.
5. In the Layout dialog box, edit the
Orientation to X-Symmetric.
Click Preview.
Notice that the cavity layout
is symmetric about the mold
model's X-axis.

6. In the Layout dialog box, edit the


Orientation to Y-Symmetric.
Click Preview.
7. Notice that the cavity layout
is symmetric about the mold
model's Y-axis.

Module 4 | Page 44

2015 PTC

8. In the Layout dialog box, edit the


Layout to Circular.
Edit the Orientation to
Constant if necessary.
Edit the Radius to 30.
Click Preview.
9. Notice that the cavities all face
the same constant direction.

10. In the Layout dialog box, edit the


Orientation to Radial.
Click Preview.
11. Notice that the cavity layout is
radial about the mold model's
origin.

12. In the Layout dialog box, edit the


Layout to Single.
Notice that all Orientation
options are grayed out.
Click OK.
13. Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 45

Calculating Projected Area


You can calculate the projected area of the reference model to
help calculate the clamping force needed to keep a mold set
closed during operation.
Specify the entity.
Specify the projection direction.
Projected area is calculated.

Figure 1 Calculating Projected


Area

Figure 2 Illustration of
Projected Area

Calculating Projected Area


You can calculate the projected area of the reference model to help calculate
the clamping force needed to keep a mold set closed during operation. To
calculate the projected area, you can click Projected Area
Analysis group. This opens the Measure dialog box.

from the

In the Measure dialog box, you must specify the following items:
Entity Specifies the entity that is to be projected. You can select the
following entity types:
All Ref Parts This is the default Entity selection.
Surface
Quilt
Facets
Projection Direction Specifies the direction that the Entity is projected.
You can specify any of the following projection direction references:
Default Pull Direction This is the default Projection Direction.
None
Plane Enables you to select a plane that the direction is perpendicular
to.
Line/Axis Enables you to select a line or axis as the direction.
Module 4 | Page 46

2015 PTC

Coordinate System Enables you to select a coordinate system. Once


you select the coordinate system, you must specify which coordinate
axis defines the direction.
View Plane Uses the current viewing plane as the projection reference.
Once you have defined the entity and projection direction, you can click
Compute to calculate the projected area of the entity. The selected entity is
projected onto an imaginary plane that is perpendicular to the projection
reference, as shown in Figure 2. The area of this projection is calculated.

2015 PTC

Module 4 | Page 47

PROCEDURE - Calculating Projected Area


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Projected-Area
Task 1:

PROJ-AREA.ASM

Calculate the projected area of a reference model in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Click Projected Area
the Analysis group.

from

3. In the Measure dialog box, notice


that the default Entity is All Ref
Parts.
Notice that the default
Projection Direction is Default
Pull Direction.
Notice the projected area of
the reference model.

4. Enable Plane Display

5. In the Measure dialog box, edit


the Projection Direction to Plane.
Prehighlight datum plane
MOLD_FRONT and then
select it.
Click Compute.
Notice the updated projected
area.
Click Close.

This completes the procedure.

Module 4 | Page 48

2015 PTC

Module

Shrinkage
Module Overview
You apply shrinkage to accommodate the contraction that occurs in the
reference model during cooling, and also ensure that the final mold model
matches the original design model.
In this module, you learn about shrinkage and how to apply it to the reference
model.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Explain the purpose of applying shrinkage to a mold model.
Apply shrinkage by scale to the reference model.
Apply shrinkage by dimensions to the reference model.

2015 PTC

Module 5 | Page 1

Understanding Shrinkage
You can apply shrinkage to a model to compensate for the
shrinkage that tends to occur as a molded part cools.
There are two methods to
apply shrinkage:
Shrinkage by Scale
Shrinkage by Dimension
Formula options:
1+S
1/1S
Where S is the shrinkage
ratio
You can view the Shrink Info
for the applied shrinkage.

Figure 1 Shrinkage Dialog Boxes

Understanding Shrinkage
When a molded part is removed from a mold, it tends to shrink in size as it
cools down to room temperature. The amount of shrinkage that occurs in
a molding is highly dependent on part geometry, mold configuration, and
processing conditions. Because the mold components are designed from
the reference model, you must consider the shrinkage of the material in the
reference model before you proceed with the rest of the mold design process.
This typically means that you proportionally increase dimensions of the
reference model so that the mold components created are of the pre-shrunk
molding size.
You can apply shrinkage to the reference model in Mold mode. Depending
on the method of applying shrinkage and the method used to assemble the
reference model, the shrinkage feature may propagate to the design model.
Creo Parametric uses the following formulae to calculate shrinkage:
1+S Uses a precalculated shrinkage factor that is based on the original
geometry of the reference model.
1/(1S) Enables you to specify a shrinkage factor that is based upon the
final geometry of the reference model once shrinkage is applied.
In the above formulae, S is the shrinkage ratio specified.
There are two different methods to apply shrinkage:
Shrinkage by Dimension
Shrinkage by Scale

Viewing Shrinkage Information


When shrinkage has been applied to a reference model, you can view the
information regarding the shrinkage by clicking the Analysis group drop-down
Module 5 | Page 2

2015 PTC

menu and selecting Shrinkage Information


. An information window
appears, providing you with the following details:
Model name Specifies the name of the model that shrinkage was
applied to.
Shrinkage method Specifies whether the model is shrunk by scaling
or by dimension.
Shrinkage formula Specifies which formula was used to apply the
shrinkage to the model.
Model Dimensions and Shrinkage Value When shrinkage has been
applied by dimensions, these specify which dimensions the shrinkage was
applied to and the shrinkage value applied to each dimension.
Shrink coordinate system Specifies the coordinate system specified
when shrinkage is applied by scaling.
Shrink factors Specifies the shrink scaling factors used when shrinkage
is applied by scaling.

2015 PTC

Module 5 | Page 3

Applying Shrinkage by Scale


You can shrink part geometry by scaling it in relation to
coordinate system directions.
You can apply shrinkage by scale
to all three directions uniformly.
Isotropic
You can apply different shrinkage
ratios to each of the three
coordinate system directions.
X-Direction
Y-Direction
Z-Direction

Figure 2 Isotropic Shrinkage


by Scale Applied

Figure 1 Model Before


Shrinkage Applied

Figure 3 Different Shrinkage


Ratios Applied to Different
Directions

Applying Shrinkage by Scale


The Shrinkage by Scale method enables you to shrink the part geometry
by scaling it in relation to a coordinate system. You can specify different
shrinkage ratios for the X, Y, and Z-coordinates. If you apply shrinkage
in Mold mode, it applies only to the reference model and does not affect
the design model.
Shrinkage by scale is applied by creating a new shrinkage feature. When
you apply shrinkage in Mold mode, the shrinkage feature is created in the
reference model, not in the design model, unless the Same Model option was
used when assembling the reference model into the mold model.
To apply shrinkage by scale, you must specify the following items:
Coordinate System Specify the model coordinate system that the
shrinkage feature uses as a reference. The X, Y, and Z-directions of
the coordinate system determine the X, Y, and Z-directions used for the
shrinkage ratio.
Formula Specify the formula you want to use to calculate shrinkage.
Shrink Ratio Specifies the ratio of shrinkage you want to apply.
Module 5 | Page 4

2015 PTC

The following options are available when applying shrinkage by scale:


Isotropic When enabled, sets the same shrinkage ratio for the X, Y, and
Z-directions. You can clear this check box to specify a different shrinkage
ratio for each of the three directions.
Forward references When enabled, the shrinkage does not create new
geometry but changes the existing geometry so that all existing references
continue to be part of the model. You can clear this check box to have
the system create new geometry for the part on which shrinkage is being
applied.

Considerations when Applying Shrinkage by Scale


When applying shrinkage by scale in Mold mode, keep the following in mind:
A negative shrinkage ratio shrinks the dimension, while a positive shrinkage
ratio expands it. For example, a positive 0.02 shrinkage ratio applied with
the 1+S formula expands all the model dimensions by 2 percent, while a
negative 0.02 shrinkage ratio shrinks all the model dimensions by 2 percent.
It is never reflected in the design model, unless the design model is the
reference model.
If it is applied to the design model in Part mode, then the shrinkage feature
belongs to the design model, not to the reference model. Shrinkage is
accurately reflected by the reference model geometry, but it cannot be
cleared in Mold mode.
It should be applied prior to the definition of parting surfaces or volumes.
It affects part geometry (surfaces and edges) and datum features (including
curves, axes, planes, and points).

2015 PTC

Module 5 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Applying Shrinkage by Scale


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Shrinkage_Scale
Task 1:

SHRINKAGE_SCALE.ASM

Apply shrinkage by scale to a reference model.


The shrinkage ratios specified in this procedure are not
representative of real-world shrinkage ratios. Higher ratios are
used so that you can actually see that the geometry changes,
due to applying shrinkage.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:

2. In the model tree,


expand reference model
SHRINKAGE_SCALE.PRT.
3. Right-click Extrude 1 and select
Edit

4. Notice the three feature


dimensions.

5. Select Shrink by scale


from
the Shrinkage types drop-down
menu in the Modifiers group.
6. Select coordinate system
PRT_CSYS_DEF.
7. In the Shrinkage By Scale dialog
box, select 1+S
as the
Formula, if necessary.
Verify that the Isotropic check
box is selected.
Edit the Shrink Ratio to 0.5.
Click Preview Feature

8. Notice that the entire model


uniformly gets larger.

Module 5 | Page 6

2015 PTC

9. In the Shrinkage By Scale dialog


box, clear the Isotropic check
box.
Edit the X Shrink Ratio to 0.25.
Edit the Y Shrink Ratio to 0.25.
Edit the Z Shrink Ratio to 0.75.
Click OK

10. Notice that the model has grown


larger in the Z-coordinate system
direction than in the other two
directions.
11. Right-click Extrude 1 and select
Edit

12. Notice that even though


shrinkage was applied, the
original dimensions remain
unchanged.

13. Click the Analysis group


drop-down menu and select
Shrinkage Information

14. Notice the shrinkage information


in the information window.
Click Close.
15. Right-click Shrinkage id 4566
and select Edit Definition

16. In the Shrinkage By Scale dialog


box, select 1/1-S
Formula.
Click OK

as the

17. Notice that the resulting


geometry is even more distorted.
The shrinkage is based on
the final geometry now that
shrinkage is applied.

This completes the procedure.


2015 PTC

Module 5 | Page 7

Applying Shrinkage by Dimension


You can specify one shrinkage ratio for all model dimensions, or
specify unique ratios for individual model dimensions.
Dimensions with shrinkage ratios
applied appear magenta in the
graphics window.
Select individual feature
dimensions to add shrinkage
ratios to.
Select a feature to add shrinkage
ratios to all of its dimensions.
Figure 1 Model Before
Shrinkage Applied

Figure 2 Shrinkage Ratio Applied


to All Dimensions

Figure 3 Different Shrinkage


Ratios Applied to Specific
Dimensions

Applying Shrinkage by Dimension


The Shrinkage by Dimension method enables you to set up one shrinkage
ratio for all model dimensions, and specify ratios for individual dimensions.
To apply shrinkage by dimension, you must specify the following items:
Formula Specify the formula you want to use to calculate shrinkage.
Dimensions Specify which dimensions to add shrinkage to.
Shrinkage Ratio Specifies the ratio of shrinkage you want to apply.
Within the Shrinkage By Dimension dialog box, a table displays the following
columns:
Dimensions Displays which dimensions have a shrinkage ratio applied.
The dimension symbol and original value are displayed in the cell.
Ratio Displays the shrinkage ratio for each dimension in the table.
Final value Displays the final dimension value once the shrinkage ratio
has been applied.
You can specify a shrinkage ratio for All Dimensions in the model. The
shrinkage ratio is in the first row of the Shrinkage Ratio table. In Figure 2, a
shrinkage ratio of 0.5 has been applied to all dimensions.
To add additional dimensions to the table, you can use the following methods:
Module 5 | Page 8

2015 PTC

Insert Selected Dimensions


Displays the dimensions for a selected
feature, enabling you to select and apply the desired shrinkage ratio. In
Figure 3, the 3 hole diameter dimension has had a shrinkage ratio applied
to it.
Enables you to select a
Insert All Dimensions From Feature
feature in the graphics window. All dimensions comprising that feature are
automatically added to the table. In Figure 3, all three dimensions of the
main extrude feature have had a shrinkage ratio applied.
and type the symbol for the
You can also click Add New Row
dimension. You can see what a given dimension's symbol is by clicking
Toggle Dimensions

The following options are available when applying shrinkage by dimension:


Change Dimensions of Design Part Determines whether the shrinkage
feature is placed in the design model. Depending on the method of
reference model creation, this option may be grayed out. For example, if
the reference model was created using the Same Model, this option does
nothing, as the feature is created in the design model regardless.

Considerations when Applying Shrinkage by Dimension


When applying shrinkage by dimension, keep the following in mind:
A negative shrinkage ratio shrinks the dimension, while a positive shrinkage
ratio expands it. For example, a positive 0.02 shrinkage ratio applied with
the 1+S formula expands all the model dimensions by 2 percent, while a
negative 0.02 shrinkage ratio shrinks all the model dimensions by 2 percent.
If the part has had shrinkage applied, dimensions display in magenta when
viewed in the design model or a drawing, as shown in Figures 2 and 3.
If the part has not had shrinkage applied, dimensions remain displayed in
black when viewed in the design model or a drawing.
Shrinkage by dimension values is not cumulative. For example, if you
specify 1.5 as the All Dimensions shrinkage ratio for a model with 10 as
the value of all its dimensions, and then specify a separate shrinkage
ratio of 2.0 for the length dimension, then the final length is 20 (10*2.0),
not 30 [(10*1.5)*2.0]. Individual shrinkage values for dimensions always
supersede the overall model shrink value.
The configuration file option, shrinkage_value_display, determines how
dimensions are displayed when shrinkage is applied to a model. The
possible values of this configuration option are percent_shrink and
final_value. For the procedure, the value for this configuration option is
percent_shrink.
By default, whenever a part has shrinkage information associated with it,
the nominal dimension values are displayed, followed by the shrinkage
value in parentheses. If you set the value of the configuration file option
shrinkage_value_display to percent_shrink, shrinkage is represented as
percentage of the nominal dimension. You can display the final value of the
shrunken dimensions by changing the value of the configuration file option
shrinkage_value_display to final_value.

2015 PTC

Module 5 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Applying Shrinkage by Dimension


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Shrinkage_Dimension
Task 1:

SHRINKAGE_DIM.ASM

Apply shrinkage by dimension to a reference model.


The shrinkage ratios specified in this procedure are not
representative of real-world shrinkage ratios. Higher ratios are
used so that you can actually see that the geometry changes,
due to applying shrinkage.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. In the model tree,
expand reference model
SHRINKAGE_DIM.PRT.
3. Right-click Extrude 1 and select
Edit

4. Notice the three feature


dimensions.
5. Select Shrink by dimension
from the Shrinkage types
drop-down menu in the Modifiers
group.
6. In the Shrinkage By Dimension
dialog box, verify that the
Formula is 1+S
.
Edit the ratio to 0.5 for All
Dimensions, and click OK

7. Notice that the model gets


uniformly larger.
8. Click in the background to
de-select all geometry.
9. In the model tree, right-click
Extrude 1 and select Edit

10. Notice that the dimensions are


magenta and display the percent
increase they have undergone.
11. Right-click Round 1 and select
Edit

Module 5 | Page 10

2015 PTC

12. Click Shrink by dimension


.
Edit the ratio to -0.5 for All
.
Dimensions, and click OK
13. Click in the background to
de-select all geometry.
14. In the model tree, right-click
Extrude 1 and select Edit
.
Right-click Round 1 and select
Edit

15. Notice that the dimensions are


magenta and display the percent
decrease they have undergone.
16. Click Shrink by dimension
.
Edit the ratio to 0.0 for All
Dimensions.
Click Insert Selected
and select
Dimensions
Hole 1.
Select the 3 dimension.
Click Insert All Dimensions
.
From Feature
Select Extrude 1.
17. In the Shrinkage Ratio table, edit
the ratio for dimension d6 to 0.5.
Edit the d1 ratio to 0.75.
Edit the d2 ratio to 0.15.
Edit the d0 ratio to 0.75.
Notice the final values for each
of the dimensions in the table
.
and click OK
18. Click in the background to
de-select all geometry.
19. In the model tree, right-click
Extrude 1 and select Edit
.
Right-click Hole 1 and select
Edit

20. Notice the different individual


percentage shrinkage increases.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 5 | Page 11

Module 5 | Page 12

2015 PTC

Module

Workpieces
Module Overview
Once you have created the mold model, you can create and assemble
the workpiece. The workpiece represents the full volume of all the mold
components that are needed to create the completed mold model. You can
also apply style states to the workpiece to make them transparent within
the mold model.
In this module, you learn how to create and assemble workpieces in a mold
model.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Explain the different display styles you can apply to components when
creating style states.
Create a workpiece automatically.
Create a custom automatic workpiece.
Create and assemble a workpiece manually.
Reclassify mold model components.

2015 PTC

Module 6 | Page 1

Creating Display Styles


Use display styles to assign display settings to individual
components of an assembly.
Model display settings are independent of the assembly.
Display options include:
Wireframe
Hidden Line
Shaded
Transparent
You can also blank, or hide, components individually.

Figure 1 Original Model

Figure 2 Viewing a Display Style

Creating Display Styles


The display of models in a Creo Parametric session are controlled by the four
following display options: Wireframe, Hidden Line, No Hidden, and Shaded.
You can also assign display styles to individual components in an assembly
that can be used regardless of those overall session settings.
Use the Style tab in the view manager to create display styles for your
assembly.
You can assign one of the following display styles to components in an
assembly:
Wireframe Shows front and back lines equally.
Hidden Line Shows hidden lines in ghost tones.
No Hidden Does not show lines behind forward surfaces.
Shaded Shows the model as a shaded solid.
Transparent Shows the model as a transparent solid.
Blank Does not show the model.
You can apply existing display styles to sub-assemblies using the By Display
tab. When you select a sub-assembly from the model tree, the available
display styles for that sub-assembly display in the By Display tab, enabling
you to specify the desired one.
You can also modify component display styles without using the view
manager. You can select desired models in the graphics window, model tree,
Module 6 | Page 2

2015 PTC

or search tool and click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style to assign a display style to the selected models.
You can store these temporary edits with a new display style or update them
to an existing one.
After you define the default style, it appears each time the model is opened.

Uses of Display Styles


You use display styles to do the following:
Increase system performance by either blanking components from display
or limiting the number of components being calculated for hidden line
display.
Create and save display settings used in presentations or other common
situations where it is helpful to change the display of components within
an assembly.
You cannot use display styles in drawing view.
Blanked components are not removed from session memory; they
are only removed from display. For this reason, you cannot use
display styles to reduce the amount of memory required to open
and work with an assembly. You reduce the required memory using
simplified reps.

2015 PTC

Module 6 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating Display Styles


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

View\Display-Style_View-Manager
Task 1:

GEARBOX_S2.ASM

Create a new display style using the view manager.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Click View Manager

from the In Graphics toolbar.

3. Select the Style tab from the view manager.


4. Click New.
5. Press ENTER to accept the
default name Style0001.
Notice this opens the EDIT
dialog box on the Blank tab.
6. In the model tree, select
GEARBOX_REAR_S2.PRT.
7. Click Preview.

8. In the model tree, select the four


BOLT_5-18.PRT models.
Notice that the Blank
component status is shown in
the Edit column of the model
tree.
9. Click Preview.
10. In the EDIT dialog box, select
the Show tab and select
Transparent.
11. In the model tree, expand the
DRILL_CHUCK_S2.ASM
node and then select
CHUCK_S2.PRT and
GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT.
12. Click Preview.
13. Click OK.

Module 6 | Page 4

2015 PTC

Task 2:

Copy and redefine to create a new display style.

1. With Style0001 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.
2. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0002.
3. Double-click Style0002 to activate it.
4. Click Edit > Redefine from the view manager.
5. In the model tree, select
CHUCK_S2.PRT and
PRIME_GEAR_S2.PRT to
also be blanked.
6. Click Preview.
7. From the In Graphics toolbar,
select Hidden Line
from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.
8. Click OK.
Task 3:

Use the model tree to edit a display style.

1. With Style0002 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.
2. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0003.
3. Double-click display style Style0003 to activate it.
4. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading
Style types drop-down menu.
5. In the model tree, click Settings

from the Display

and select Tree Columns

6. In the Model Tree Columns


dialog box, select Display
Styles from the Type drop-down
list.
7. In the Display Style list, select
STYLE0003 and click Add
Column
to add the column to
the model tree.
8. Click OK.
9. In the STYLE0003 column of
the model tree, click to the right
of GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT
and select Blank from the
drop-down list.
10. To the right of PRIME_GEAR_
S2.PRT, select Undo from the
drop-down list.

2015 PTC

Module 6 | Page 5

11. In the model tree, click Settings

and select Tree Columns

12. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, click Remove Column
and OK.
Using the model tree to edit display styles does not provide you
with the option to preview or reset any edits that you make.
This completes the procedure.

Module 6 | Page 6

2015 PTC

Creating a Workpiece Automatically


The workpiece is a model that represents the full volume of all
the mold components that are needed to create the final mold
model.
The workpiece displays
transparent green in the graphics
window.
The automatic workpiece accuracy
is automatically matched to the
reference model.
The workpiece creates multiple
shapes:
Standard Rectangular
Standard Round
Custom

Figure 1 Viewing the Workpiece


in the Model Tree

Figure 2 Standard Rectangular


Workpiece

Figure 3 Standard Round


Workpiece

Creating a Workpiece Automatically


Once you assemble the reference model into the mold model, you typically
create and assemble the workpiece next. The workpiece is a model that
represents the full volume of all the mold components (cavity, core, and
inserts) that are needed to create the final mold model. The workpiece icon
that displays in the model tree is different than that of a conventional part
model and the reference model, which is shown in Figure 1. The workpiece
displays transparent green in the graphics window.
To automatically create a workpiece, select Automatic Workpiece
from
the Workpiece types drop-down menu. The workpiece is automatically
assembled to the specified Origin coordinate system using the Coincident
assembly constraint, and the accuracy is automatically set to match that
of the reference model.
To create an automatic workpiece, you must specify the following items:
Mold Origin The Mold Origin is a mold model coordinate system from
which directions are determined for workpiece creation.
2015 PTC

Module 6 | Page 7

Shape The shape determines the shape of the workpiece. The system
creates a workpiece with the minimum dimensions that the reference model
fits in, within the specified shape. The following options are available:
Standard Rectangular This creates a rectangular workpiece using
, which is shown in Figure 2.
Create Rectangular Workpiece
Standard Round This creates a round-shaped workpiece using Create
, which is shown in Figure 3.
Round Workpiece
Custom Custom creates a custom-shaped workpiece using Create
.
Custom Workpiece
Units This specifies the system of units for the workpiece. You can select
inches or millimeters.
Offsets This enables you to specify the offset values to add to the
dimensions of the workpiece, based on the mold origin. The offsets depend
on the shape of the workpiece that you have selected. You can specify
each offset individually, or specify all offsets uniformly. The following offset
options are available:
X-direction This adds material in the positive or negative X-direction.
This offset is available for only the Standard Rectangular shape and
some custom shapes.
Y-direction This adds material in the positive or negative Y-direction.
This offset is available for only the Standard Rectangular shape and
some custom shapes.
Z-direction This adds material in the positive or negative Z-direction.
Radial Radial adds material in the positive radial direction.
Uniform Offsets This adds material in the positive and negative X-, Y-,
and Z-directions, and Radial, where applicable.
Overall Dimensions The overall dimensions get updated when you specify
offset values. However, you can also specify the overall dimensions, and
the offset values get updated automatically. You can manually specify
the X and Y dimensions for rectangular and custom workpieces, and the
Diameter for rounded workpieces, to customize the workpiece size. You
can manually specify the Z Cavity and Z Core dimensions for all workpieces
to customize the size.
Translate Workpiece This enables you to specify the translation values
for the X- and Y-directions to position the workpiece around the reference
model.
You can modify the default Workpiece Name. The Workpiece Name is the
name of the workpiece component as it displays in the model tree. By
default, its name is of the format <MOLD-MODEL-NAME>_WRK, which is
shown in Figure 1.

Module 6 | Page 8

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating a Workpiece Automatically


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Workpiece_Auto
Task 1:

AUTO-WRKPIECE_RECT.ASM

Create a rectangular workpiece in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select Automatic Workpiece
from the Workpiece
types drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
group.
3. Select coordinate system
MOLD_DEF_CSYS from the
model tree.
4. In the Automatic Workpiece
dialog box, notice the name of
the workpiece.
5. In the Automatic Workpiece
dialog box, click Create
Rectangular Workpiece

if necessary.
Verify that the Units are in mm.
Notice that there are no Offsets
specified.
Notice the Overall X, Y, and Z
dimensions.
Click Preview.

6. Notice that the workpiece just


barely covers the reference
model.
7. In the Automatic Workpiece
dialog box, edit the Uniform
Offsets value to 30.
Notice that the X, Y, and Z
direction +/- offsets all become
30.
Notice that the Overall
dimensions' values have also
updated automatically.
Click Preview.

2015 PTC

Module 6 | Page 9

8. In the Automatic Workpiece


dialog box, type 40 for the - and
+ offsets in the Y direction.
Click Preview.

9. In the Automatic Workpiece


dialog box, edit the Overall X
Dimension to 340.
Edit the Overall Y Dimension
to 160.
Notice that the Offset values
have updated.
Click OK.
Task 2:

Create a round workpiece in a mold model.

1. Click Open
and double-click
AUTO-WRKPIECE_ROUND.
ASM.
2. Select Automatic Workpiece
from the Workpiece types
drop-down menu and select
MOLD_DEF_CSYS.
3. In the Automatic Workpiece
dialog box, click Create Round
Workpiece
.
Edit the Radial Offset to 5.
Edit the +Z Cavity to 6.
Edit the -Z Core to 6.
Click Preview.
4. In the Automatic Workpiece
dialog box, drag the Translate
Workpiece X direction slider to
the right.
Drag the Translate Workpiece
Y direction slider to the left and
click Preview.
5. In the Automatic Workpiece
dialog box, edit the X and Y
Translate Workpiece Directions
to 0 and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Module 6 | Page 10

2015 PTC

Creating a Custom Automatic Workpiece


A custom automatic workpiece enables you to add flanges to
the top and bottom of the workpiece and rounds or chamfers to
the vertical edges.
The process is the same as
creating a rectangular or round
workpiece.
The default custom shape
for a custom workpiece is
BLOCK_XY_FLANGES.
Many other shapes are available.

Figure 1 BLOCK_XY_FLANGES
Custom Workpiece

Figure 2 CHAMF_CHAMF_XY_
BOT_FLANGE Custom Workpiece

Figure 3 BAR_TOP_FLANGE
Custom Workpiece

Creating a Custom Automatic Workpiece


In addition to a Standard Rectangular and Standard Round automatic
workpiece, you can also create a custom workpiece. A custom automatic
workpiece enables you to add flanges to the top and bottom of the workpiece.
It also enables you to add rounds or chamfers to the vertical workpiece edges.
The process is the same as creating a rectangular or round workpiece.
To create a custom automatic workpiece, you can use the Create Custom
Workpiece
option in the Automatic Workpiece dialog box, and then
select the desired shape in the drop-down list below it. The default shape
for a custom workpiece is BLOCK_XY_FLANGES, as shown in Figure 1.
However, the following shapes are also available:

BLOCK_00_FLANGES
BLOCK_00_BOT_FLANGE
BLOCK_CHAMF_00_FLANGES
CHAMF_CHAMF_00_BOT_FLANGE
BLOCK_ROUND

2015 PTC

Module 6 | Page 11

BLOCK_ROUND_00_TOP_FLANGE
BAR_FLANGES
BAR_BOT_FLANGE
BLOCK_00_TOP_FLANGE
BLOCK_CHAMF
BLOCK_CHAMF_00_TOP_FLANGE
BLOCK_CHAMF_00_BOT_FLANGE
BLOCK_ROUND_00_FLANGES
BLOCK_ROUND_00_BOT_FLANGE
BAR_TOP_FLANGE
The 00 value in the shapes above represent the X, Y, or XY
direction.

You can use the offsets available for the rectangular and round automatic
workpiece for a custom workpiece.

Module 6 | Page 12

2015 PTC

Creating and Assembling a Workpiece Manually


You can create a part model inside or outside of Mold mode and
designate it as the workpiece when assembling it into the mold
model.
Use conventional part modeling
techniques.
Assemble workpiece using
conventional assembly
constraints.
The accuracy of a manually
created workpiece must be
matched to the reference model.
Figure 1 Part Model

Figure 2 Creating a Workpiece


within the Mold Model

Figure 3 Part Model Assembled


as Workpiece

Creating a Workpiece Manually


You can create a workpiece manually using either of the following methods:
Create the workpiece within the mold model by selecting Create
from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in the
Workpiece
Reference Model & Workpiece group. The Component Create dialog box
appears, and you must provide the name of the workpiece component as it
displays in the model tree.
Create the workpiece outside the mold model as a conventional part model.
When the part model is needed as the workpiece in the mold model, you
can assemble it as a component into the mold model and designate it
as the workpiece.
When creating the workpiece manually, you can use any of the conventional
part modeling feature techniques available when creating a regular part
model. For example, you can use Extrude features, Revolve features, Hole
features, Sweep features, and Blend features.

2015 PTC

Module 6 | Page 13

Assembling a Manually Created Workpiece


If the workpiece is created in the mold model, it is already designated as
the workpiece upon its creation. It must then be properly assembled into
the mold model.
If you create a part model outside of the mold and want to use it as the
workpiece in a mold model, you must assemble it into the mold model and
designate it as the workpiece. You can do this by selecting Assemble
Workpiece
from the Workpiece types drop-down menu in the Reference
Model & Workpiece group.
You can assemble the workpiece into the mold model using any of the
available assembly constraints including Default
Distance

, Angle Offset

, Parallel

, Coincident

, and Normal

Considerations When Creating and Assembling a Workpiece


Manually
Keep the following in mind when creating and assembling a workpiece
manually:
If you manually create a workpiece and assemble it into the mold model,
you need to match the workpiece accuracy to that of the reference model.
Keep the location of where the workpiece is split in mind. You can create a
datum plane or coordinate system at this location to aid in the assembly
process later.

Best Practices
It is a best practice to create an automatic workpiece whenever possible.
When an automatic workpiece is created, Creo Parametric automatically sets
the accuracy of the workpiece model to that of the reference model. If a
manual workpiece is created and assembled into the mold model, you must
manually modify the workpiece accuracy so that it matches the reference
model.

Module 6 | Page 14

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating and Assembling a Workpiece


Manually
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Workpiece_Manual
Task 1:

MANUAL_WRK.PRT

Assemble a workpiece created outside the mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:

2. Notice the part model and its


datum planes.
The accuracy has already
been set to that of the
reference model.
3. Click Close
from the Quick
Access toolbar.
4. Click Open
CAP.ASM.

and double-click

5. Select Assemble Workpiece


from the Workpiece
types drop-down menu in the
Reference Model & Workpiece
group.
6. In the Open dialog
box, double-click
MANUAL_WRK.PRT.
7. In the dashboard, select
from the constraint
Default
drop-down list.
Click Complete Component
.
8. Notice the component is now in
the workpiece color.
9. Notice the workpiece symbol in
the model tree.
10. Click Close

2015 PTC

Module 6 | Page 15

Task 2:

Create and assemble a workpiece in the mold model.

1. Click Open

and double-click CAP_ROUND.ASM.

2. Select Create Workpiece


from the Workpiece types drop-down
menu in the Reference Model & Workpiece group.
3. In the Component Create dialog
box, type ROUND_WRK as the
Name and click OK.
4. In the Creation Options dialog
box, select Copy from existing
if necessary and click Browse.
Select Working Directory
and double-click
MMNS_PART_SOLID.PRT.
Click OK.
5. In the dashboard, select
from the constraint
Default
drop-down list and click
Complete Component

6. In the model tree, right-click


ROUND_WRK.PRT and select
Activate

7. Pre-highlight datum plane TOP


and then select it.
8. Click Extrude
Shapes group.

from the

9. Enable only the following


Sketcher Display types:
.
10. Click Center and Point
from the Circle types drop-down
menu in the Sketching group and
sketch a circle, using the origin
as the circle center.
11. Middle-click and edit the
diameter to 80.
12. Click OK

Module 6 | Page 16

2015 PTC

13. Edit the depth to 45.


14. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.
Select Blind as the Side 2
depth and edit the depth to 15.
Click Complete Feature

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 6 | Page 17

Reclassifying and Removing Mold Model


Components
Reclassifying mold components is a great way to switch which
component is used as the workpiece.
Each component type can be
reclassified to any other type:
Workpiece
Mold Base Component
Mold Component
You cannot reclassify the reference
model.

Figure 1 Mold Model Before


Reclassification

Figure 2 Mold Base Component


Reclassified to a Workpiece

Figure 3 Mold Model After


Reclassification

Reclassifying Mold Model Components


You can switch the classification of components within the mold model.
Reclassifying mold components is a great way to switch which component
is used as the workpiece. Each of the following component types can be
reclassified to any of the other types:
Workpiece The mold model uses the selected component as a
workpiece. In Figure 2, the rectangular mold base component has been
reclassified as a workpiece.
Mold Base Component The mold model uses the selected component
as a mold base component. In Figure 3, the round workpiece has been
reclassified as a mold base component.
Mold Component The mold model uses the selected component as
a mold component.
Module 6 | Page 18

2015 PTC

The following are some points to keep in mind when reclassifying mold model
components:
You cannot reclassify the reference model.
You cannot reclassify a different model to become a reference model.
The mold model can contain multiple workpieces. In Figure 2, a mold base
component has been reclassified as a workpiece, causing there to be two
workpieces in the mold model.

Removing Mold Model Components


You can remove components from the mold model in any of the following
ways:
Select the component, right-click, and select Delete
Select the component, and press DELETE.
Select the component and select Delete
drop-down menu in the Operation group.

from the Delete types

The Undo
and Redo
operations are not available if you
remove components from the mold model.

2015 PTC

Module 6 | Page 19

PROCEDURE - Reclassifying and Removing Mold Model


Components
Close Window
Mold\Reclassify
Task 1:

Erase Not Displayed


RECLASSIFY.ASM

Reclassify mold model components.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Notice the round workpiece in
the mold model.
3. Notice also the rectangular mold
base component.

4. Click Classify
Modifiers group.

from the

5. Select MANUAL_WRK.PRT and


click OK from the Select dialog
box.
6. Click Workpiece > Done from
the menu manager.
7. Notice that there are now two
workpieces in the mold model.

8. Select ROUND_WRK.PRT and


click OK from the Select dialog
box.
9. Click Mld Base Cmp > Done
from the menu manager.
10. Click OK from the Select dialog
box.
11. Notice that there is now only one
workpiece in the mold model.

Module 6 | Page 20

2015 PTC

Task 2:

Remove a mold model component.

1. Select ROUND_WRK.PRT,
right-click, and select Delete

2. Click OK from the Delete dialog


box.
3. Notice the mold base component
is removed from the mold model.

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 6 | Page 21

Module 6 | Page 22

2015 PTC

Module

Mold Volume Creation


Module Overview
Once the reference model and workpiece have been assembled into the mold
model you must create mold volumes within the mold model. Mold volumes
are surfaces that locate a closed volume of space in the workpiece, and are
ultimately used to create the final mold core, cavity, and slider components.
In this module, you learn which mold volumes are in a mold model and how
to create them.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Understand and explain some of the basic surfacing terms.
Understand what mold volumes are and explain their characteristics.
Sketch mold volumes.
Create sliders using boundary quilts.
Sketch sliders.
Create a reference part cutout.
Sketch lifter and insert mold volumes.
Replace surfaces and trim to geometry.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 1

Surfacing Terms
Surface modeling terms are important to understand because
they are used throughout this course.
Surfaces
Quilt
Surface Patch
Solid Surface
Datum Planes
Edges
Surface edge
One-sided
Two-sided
Solid edge

Figure 1 Viewing a Surface

Figure 2 Surface Quilt

Figure 3 Solid Surface


and Edge

Figure 4 Surface Edge

Surfacing Terms
Surface modeling terms are used throughout this course. Therefore, they
are important to understand.
Surface Surfaces are infinitely thin, non-solid features used to aid in the
design of highly complex and irregular shapes. Notice that surfaces are
shown using orange and purple highlighting on the edges when viewed in
wireframe display, as in Figure 1.
Orange denotes outer or one-sided edges.
Purple denotes inner or two-sided edges, since they border two surface
patches.
In Creo Parametric, the term surface can be used for any of the following:
Quilts A quilt may consist of a single surface or a collection of surfaces.
A quilt represents a patchwork of connected surfaces. A multi-surface
quilt contains information describing the geometry of all the surfaces
that compose it, and information on how these surfaces are joined or
intersected, such as the models shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Module 7 | Page 2

2015 PTC

Surface Patch If you create a surface feature, which is made of several


segments, the surface is created with multiple patches, as in Figure 1.
Solid Surfaces A face of a solid feature, such as the solid model shown
in Figure 3.
Datum Planes A planar datum feature that extends infinitely but is
represented by a rectangular border.
Edge An edge is the boundary of a solid, as in Figure 3 or a surface, as in
Figure 4. Surface edges can be one-sided or two-sided depending on the
presence of adjacent surface geometry.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 3

Understanding Mold Volumes


A mold volume consists of surfaces that locate a closed volume
of space within the workpiece.
Mold volumes:
Have no solid material.
Are ultimately used to create
solid mold components.
Are assembly-level features.
As a best practice you should
rename mold volumes.
You can apply finishing features
such as rounds and drafts.
Figure 1 Model Tree of
Mold Model

Figure 2 Mold Volumes Shaded

Figure 3 Mold Volumes No Hidden

Understanding Mold Volumes


A mold volume consists of surfaces that locate a closed volume of space
within the workpiece. Because the mold volume is comprised of surfaces,
it has no solid material. Creating mold volumes is an intermediate step to
creating the final extracted mold components. Mold volumes are ultimately
used to create the final solid extracted mold components. Figure 2 shows
three different mold volumes. Because the mold volumes are surfaces, they
appear magenta when the model display is set to something other than
shading, as shown in Figure 3.
The following is some general information regarding mold volume creation:
A mold volume can add or remove material.
A mold volume is created as an assembly level protrusion or cut within
the mold model.
You can sketch mold volumes.
A mold volume can be trimmed or split using other surfaces.
Mold volume creation is an iterative process. You can create mold volumes
at any time after the workpiece is assembled but before the final solid mold
components are extracted.
Module 7 | Page 4

2015 PTC

A mold volume displays in the model tree with a different icon than that of the
reference model and workpiece, as shown in Figure 1.
Because mold volumes are created within the workpiece, it is
beneficial to create a style state that sets the workpiece to wireframe
when creating mold volumes. This enables you to more clearly see
inside the workpiece, yet it still makes the workpiece and its surfaces
available if they need to be selected as references. The workpiece
in the figures is set to wireframe.

Renaming Mold Volumes


When you create a mold volume, it is a best practice to rename it to
something that helps you recognize it within the model tree. To rename a
mold volume, you can click Properties
from the Controls group after
starting the mold volume creation tool. You can also right-click in the graphics
window and select Properties. This causes the Properties dialog box to
appear, which enables you to edit the mold volume name. In Figure 1, notice
that the mold volumes have been renamed.

Applying Finishing Features


You can add draft and round features to a mold volume in the same manner
in which you add to any other solid part. This enables you to customize the
mold volume. It is used to create the solid mold component.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 5

Sketching Mold Volumes


You can create a mold volume by sketching its shape.
Sketch-based feature tools
include:
Extrude
Revolve
Sweep
Blend
Swept Blend
Use Quilt

Figure 2 Mold Model with No


Mold Volumes

Figure 1 Sketching a Mold Volume

Figure 3 Mold Model with


Mold Volume

Sketching Mold Volumes


You can create a mold volume by sketching its shape. Consider the following
guidelines when sketching mold volumes:
The mold volume is a set of surfaces.
You can use most sketch-based features within Mold mode to create a
mold volume. Feature tools you can use include:
Extrudes a sketch section to a specified depth in the
Extrude
direction normal to the sketching plane.
Revolves a sketched section by a specific angle around
Revolve
an axis of rotation.
Sweeps a sketched section along a specific trajectory.
Sweep
Create constant section sweeps or variable section sweeps.
Blend tool Creates a straight or smooth blended volume by
connecting several sketched sections.
Sweeps a blend section along a specified trajectory.
Swept Blend
Use Quilt Creates a volume by referencing a surface or quilt.
Depending on the tool used and the desired mold volume, it can be
beneficial to use the workpiece surfaces as sketching planes for the mold
volumes.
The sketch must be closed.
Module 7 | Page 6

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Sketching Mold Volumes


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Volume_Sketch
Task 1:

SKETCH-VOLUME.ASM

Sketch a mold volume in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:
2. From the model tree, select
SKETCH-VOLUME_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Select Mold Volume
from the
Mold Volume types drop-down
menu in the Parting Surface &
Mold Volume group.
7. Click Properties
Controls group.

from the

8. In the Properties dialog box, edit


the Name to PLUG_VOL and
press ENTER.
9. Click Revolve
Shapes group.

from the

10. Right-click and select Define


Internal Sketch.
11. Select datum plane
MOLD_RIGHT from the model
tree as the Sketch Plane.
12. Select Top from the Orientation
drop-down list and click Sketch.
13. Click Sketch View
In Graphics toolbar.

2015 PTC

from the

Module 7 | Page 7

14. Enable only the following


Sketcher Display types:

15. From the In Graphics toolbar,


select Hidden Line
from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.
16. Click References
Setup group.

from the

17. Zoom in and select the top


workpiece surface, datum axis
A_1, the bottom of the plug, and
the angled edge.
18. Click Close from the References
dialog box.
19. Click Centerline
Datum group.

from the

20. Sketch a vertical centerline on


the axis reference.
21. Click Line Chain
from the
Sketching group and sketch the
five lines shown.
22. Click OK

23. Press CTRL+D to orient to the


Standard Orientation.
24. Click Complete Feature
from the dashboard.
25. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

26. De-select all geometry.


27. Select No Hidden
from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu and disable Axis Display
.
28. Notice that the sketched mold
volume is a surface.

Module 7 | Page 8

2015 PTC

29. Select Shading


from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 9

Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts


The system can calculate undercut areas in the reference model
and create boundary quilts to be used for automatic slider
creation.
A slider is a special type of mold
volume.
Boundary quilts are created in
undercut areas.
Slider mold volume is created from
the boundary quilt.
Slider mold volume can be
projected to a specified plane.

Figure 1 Meshing a Boundary


Quilt

Figure 2 Slider Mold Volume

Figure 3 Slider Mold Volume


Projected to Workpiece Surface

What is a Slider?
A slider is a mold component that helps account for undercuts in the
reference model geometry. Undercuts are features in the reference model
that would prevent a conventional core-and-cavity mold from opening after
the molded part has solidified. Sliders slide in from the sides to account for
these undercuts to keep the mold from locking when opening and closing, or
destroying the part. The action of these sliders is called side action.

Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts


In Creo Parametric, a slider is a special type of mold volume that can be
used to ultimately create the slider mold component. One of the ways you
can create sliders in Creo Parametric is by using boundary quilts. To create a
slider mold volume using boundary quilts, you must select Mold Volume
from the Mold Volume types drop-down menu in the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group and then click Slider
from the Volume Tools group. This
launches the Slider Volume dialog box.
Module 7 | Page 10

2015 PTC

The Slider Volume dialog box displays the reference part found in the mold
model. If the mold model contains more than one reference model, you must
specify which one is to be used for the calculation.
You can also specify the pull direction. The system utilizes the mold model's
pull direction as the default Pull Direction, but you can specify a different pull
direction by selecting any of the following references:
Plane Makes the pull direction perpendicular to the specified plane.
Curve, Edge, or Axis Makes the pull direction follow the selected curve,
edge, or axis.
Coordinate System Makes the pull direction follow the specified axis
of the selected coordinate system.
Once the pull direction has been defined, you can click Calculate Undercut
from the Slider Volume dialog box. This causes the system
Boundaries
to perform a geometry check for undercut areas in the reference model. The
system performs the check by shining a light on the reference model in the
pull direction. The areas where light does not reach are the undercuts, which
are also known as black volumes. These areas would cause the mold to lock
on opening or closing. Therefore, a slider is required in these areas.
The system creates boundary quilts in the areas where the undercuts occur
and displays them in the Exclude column of the Slider Volume dialog box.
You can select each boundary quilt and perform the following operations
on each quilt:
Mesh Meshes the boundary surface in the graphics window. In Figure 1,
the boundary surface is meshed.
Shade Shades only the boundary surface in the graphics window,
temporarily hiding all other geometry.
You can then add each quilt that you want to become a slider mold volume to
the Include column of the Slider Volume dialog box. The system automatically
extrudes the slider mold volume based on the boundary quilt. A completed
slider mold volume is shown in Figure 2.

Specifying the Projection Plane


Optionally, you can specify a projection plane for each slider mold volume.
The system extends the extruded slider volume up to the specified projection
plane, in the direction normal to the plane. In Figure 3, the right surface of the
workpiece was specified as the projection plane. The resulting slider mold
volume is projected up to this surface.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Creating Sliders using Boundary Quilts


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Slider_Boundary
Task 1:

SLIDER-CALC.ASM

Create a slider mold volume using boundary quilts in a mold


model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. From the model tree, select
SLIDER-CALC_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Click Mold Volume
from the
Parting Surface & Mold Volume
group.
7. Click Properties
Controls group.

from the

8. In the Properties dialog box, edit


the Name to CORNER_SLIDER
and press ENTER.
9. Click Slider
Tools group.

from the Volume

10. In the Slider Volume dialog


box, click Calculate Undercut
Boundaries
.
Notice that one undercut area
was found in the reference
model.

Module 7 | Page 12

2015 PTC

11. In the Slider Volume dialog box,


select Quilt 1 and click Mesh
Selected Boundary Surfaces
.
12. Notice that the quilt is meshed in
the graphics window.

13. In the Slider Volume dialog box,


click Shade Selected Boundary
Surfaces

14. Click OK from the Shade Info


dialog box.

15. In the Slider Volume dialog


box, click Include Boundary
Surfaces
to include the quilt.
Click Apply Changes
16. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

17. Notice the slider mold volume


that was created.

18. With the slider mold volume still


selected, right-click and select
Edit Definition

19. In the Slider Volume dialog box,


click Select Projection Plane
.
20. Select the right surface of the
workpiece.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 13

21. Click Apply Changes


from
the Slider Volume dialog box.
22. Notice that the slider mold
volume has extruded out to the
selected surface.

This completes the procedure.

Module 7 | Page 14

2015 PTC

Sketching Slider Mold Volumes


You can sketch slider mold volumes as an alternative to
calculating undercut boundaries.
Reasons to sketch slider mold
volumes:
Shape
Size
Result
Sketching guidelines:
Calculate undercut boundaries
for reference.
Ensure your sketched slider
accounts for the entire undercut
geometry.
The sketch must be closed.

Figure 2 Sketched Slider


Mold Volumes

Figure 1 Undesired Slider Result

Figure 3 Slider Volume too Small

Sketching Slider Mold Volumes


You can also sketch slider mold volumes. The following are reasons to
sketch slider mold volumes:
Shape When calculated undercut boundaries are used, the resulting
slider mold volume takes on the shape of the undercut geometry. If the
shape is not desired for manufacturing, or it cannot be manufactured, a
slider mold volume can be sketched to account for the undercut geometry.
In Figure 1, the shape created by calculating undercut boundaries is not as
conducive to manufacturing as the sketched slider mold volume in Figure 2.
Size Since the slider mold volume created by calculating undercut
boundaries takes on the shape of the undercut, the slider mold volume
may be too small for manufacturing, as shown in Figure 3. Consequently,
you can sketch a larger slider mold volume that accounts for the undercut,
as shown in Figure 2.
Result Depending on the reference model geometry, sometimes the
slider mold volume obtained by calculating undercut boundaries cannot be
created, or the slider mold volume does not entirely account for undercut
geometry. In Figure 1, the slider does not properly account for the round
feature, and thus a sketched mold volume was created in Figure 2.
2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 15

Guidelines for Sketching Sliders


When creating slider mold volumes using sketch-based features, consider
the following guidelines:
You can still initially calculate the undercut boundaries for the reference
model even when you are sketching the slider mold volumes. The analysis
helps you determine the locations in the mold model where sliders will
be required and helps ensure that you have accounted for all undercut
geometry.
Ensure that the sketch you create accounts for the entire undercut
geometry. That is, make sure that the entire undercut geometry is contained
within the resulting sketched slider mold volume. It can be beneficial to
utilize the sides of the undercut geometry as sketching references.
Because the slider is simply a special type of mold volume, you can use
any sketch-based feature that is available for sketching the conventional
mold volume on the slider mold volume.
Because the slider is a mold volume, the sketch must be closed.

Module 7 | Page 16

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Sketching Slider Mold Volumes


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Slider_Sketch
Task 1:

SLIDER-SKETCH.ASM

Sketch a slider mold volume in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:
2. From the model tree, select
SLIDER-SKETCH_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe
5. The left slider volume, created by
calculating undercut boundaries,
is too small to be manufactured,
so you must sketch a different
slider mold volume.
6. Select the Mold tab.
7. From the model tree, select the
LEFT_SLIDER_VOL, right-click,
and select Suppress
.
Click OK and de-select all
geometry.
8. Click Mold Volume
group.

from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume

9. Right-click and select Properties.


Type LOWER_SLIDER_VOL as the Name and press ENTER.
10. Click Extrude
Shapes group.

from the

11. Right-click and select Define


Internal Sketch.
12. Select the front workpiece
surface as the Sketch Plane.
13. Select Bottom from the
Orientation drop-down list and
click Sketch.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 17

14. Enable only the following


Sketcher Display types:
.
15. Click Sketch View
In Graphics toolbar.
16. Click References
Setup group.

from the
from the

17. Select datum planes MOLD_


RIGHT, MAIN_PARTING_PLN,
and the left and right surfaces of
the tab, zooming in if necessary.
18. Click Close from the References
dialog box.
19. Sketch, constrain, and dimension
the following sketch.
20. Click OK

21. Spin the model slightly and click


Change Depth Direction

22. In the graphics window,


right-click the depth handle
and select To Selected.
23. Right-click to query and select
the inner reference model
surface.

24. Click Complete Feature


from the dashboard.
25. Click OK
group.

Module 7 | Page 18

from the Controls

2015 PTC

Task 2:

Sketch a second slider mold volume.

1. Spin the model if necessary


and zoom in on the right slider
volume.
2. The right slider volume,
created by calculating undercut
boundaries, has not completely
accounted for the undercut
created by the round.
3. Select the RIGHT_SLIDER_
VOL, right-click, and select
Suppress
.
Click OK and de-select all
geometry.
4. Click Mold Volume

from the Controls group.


5. Click Properties
Type UPPER_SLIDER_VOL as the Name and press ENTER.
6. Click Extrude

7. Right-click and select Define


Internal Sketch.
8. Select the right workpiece
surface as the Sketch Plane.
9. Select Bottom from the
Orientation drop-down list and
click Sketch.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 19

10. Click Sketch View


11. Click References

.
.

12. Select datum planes


MOLD_FRONT and
MAIN_PARTING_PLN as
references.
13. Click Close from the References
dialog box.
14. Select Center Rectangle
from the Rectangle types
drop-down menu and sketch,
constrain, and dimension the
following sketch.
15. Click OK

16. Spin the model slightly and click


Change Depth Direction

17. In the graphics window,


right-click the depth handle
and select To Selected.
18. Right-click to query and select
the inner reference model
surface.
19. Click Complete Feature
from the dashboard.
20. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

21. Press CTRL+D to orient to the


Standard Orientation.

This completes the procedure.

Module 7 | Page 20

2015 PTC

Creating a Reference Part Cutout


A reference part cutout enables you to remove any overlapping
reference model geometry from the mold volume.
The reference model volume
is subtracted from the mold
volume.
The resulting mold volume
geometry matches the mating
reference model geometry.
It helps you to verify that you
have created the desired mold
volume.
This is not a required step.
Figure 1 Reference Model

Figure 2 Mold Volume Created

Figure 3 Reference Part


Cutout Created

Creating a Reference Part Cutout


You can create a reference part cutout on a mold volume by selecting
Reference Part Cutout
from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down
menu in the Volume Tools group. A reference part cutout enables you to
remove any overlapping reference model geometry from the mold volume.
The volume of the reference model is subtracted from the mold volume.
This is a very useful feature because the mold volume will then match the
reference model geometry. A reference part cutout enables you to create a
mold volume that completely encompasses the desired area of the reference
model and then create a reference part cutout feature.
Creating a reference part cutout is not a requirement when creating mold
volumes. The reference model geometry is automatically cut out of the mold
volumes when the volumes are split (this happens later in the process).
Creating a reference part cutout is a great method to determine if the
reference geometry can successfully be cut out during the split process. It
can also help you visualize whether or not you have created a mold volume
that captures the desired reference model geometry.
The reference part cutout option is only available if you are creating a volume
or if you are redefining the volume. The resulting reference part cutout feature
2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 21

displays in the model tree as a feature called Refpart Cutout id. However, the
mold volume for which the trim was applied is also displayed in the model
tree as shown in Figure 4:

Figure 4 Reference Part Cutout in Model Tree

Reference Part Cutout Tips


Consider the following tips when creating a reference part cutout for a mold
volume:
Without creating additional modifications to the volume after the reference
part cutout, the system makes the reference part cutout option unavailable.
Therefore, you cannot cut out a volume twice.
When more than one reference part is present, the system prompts you to
select one.

Module 7 | Page 22

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating a Reference Part Cutout


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Reference-Part_Cutout
Task 1:

REFPART-CUTOUT.ASM

Create reference part cutouts in mold volumes in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select REFPART-CUTOUT_
WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the rectangular hole in the
bottom surface.
7. In the model tree, right-click mold
volume UPPER_SLIDER_VOL
and select Unhide

8. Notice that the mold volume


completely consumes the
rectangular cut, but it also
occupies volume in the reference
model.
9. Notice that the surface of the
mold volume is flat.
10. Select mold volume
UPPER_SLIDER_VOL,
right-click, and select Redefine
Mold Volume.
11. Select Reference Part Cutout
from the Trim To Geometry
types drop-down menu in the
Volume Tools group.
12. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

13. Notice the Refpart Cutout feature


in the model tree.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 23

14. Select reference model


REFPART-CUTOUT_REF.PRT,
right-click, and select Hide

15. Notice that the reference model


volume has been subtracted
from the mold volume.
16. Right-click REFPART-CUTOUT_
REF.PRT and select Unhide

17. Pan the model to the


right to inspect the
LOWER_SLIDER_VOL2 mold
volume.
18. Again, notice that the mold
volume completely consumes
the tab and also occupies volume
in the reference model.
19. Also notice that the surface of
the mold volume is flat.
20. In the model tree, right-click
LOWER_SLIDER_VOL2 and
select Redefine Mold Volume.
21. Click Reference Part Cutout
.
22. Click OK

23. Notice the Refpart Cutout feature


in the model tree.
24. Notice that the reference model
volume has been subtracted
from the mold volume.

Module 7 | Page 24

2015 PTC

25. Pan the model to


the left to inspect
LOWER_SLIDER_VOL1.
26. In the model tree, right-click
LOWER_SLIDER_VOL1 and
select Redefine Mold Volume.
27. Click Reference Part Cutout
.
28. Click OK

29. Notice the Refpart Cutout feature


in the model tree.
30. Spin the model and notice that
the reference model volume has
been subtracted from the mold
volume.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 25

Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes


A lifter is another mold component that helps account for
undercuts of the inside of the reference model geometry.
Lifters usually move at an
angle.
Lifters are usually long and
narrow.

Figure 1 Viewing the Undercut

Figure 2 Lifter Created to Account


for Undercut

Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes


A lifter is another mold component that helps account for undercuts of the
inside of the reference model geometry. Because mold components are
ultimately created from mold volumes, you can use sketch-based features
to create lifter mold volumes in the mold model.
A lifter is usually attached to the moving side of the mold. It moves at an
angle to free the plastic that comprises the undercut inside the model. Due to
their function, lifters are normally long and narrow.

Module 7 | Page 26

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Sketching Lifter Mold Volumes


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Volume_Lifter
Task 1:

LIFTER.ASM

Sketch lifter mold volumes in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:

2. Select LIFTER_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the undercut created by
the tab.
7. Select Mold Volume
from the
Mold Volume types drop-down
menu in the Parting Surface &
Mold Volume group.
8. Click Properties
Controls group.

from the

9. Edit the mold volume name


to LIFTER_VOL1 and press
ENTER.
10. Select datum plane
MOLD_RIGHT as the Sketch
Plane.
11. Click Extrude
Shapes group.

from the

12. Click Sketch View


In Graphics toolbar.

from the

13. Select Hidden Line


from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 27

14. Enable only the following


Sketcher Display types:
.
15. Click References
from the
Setup group and select the
bottom of the workpiece and the
tab vertex as references.
Click Close.

16. Click Centerline


and sketch a
vertical and horizontal centerline
through the vertex reference.

17. Select No Hidden


from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.
18. Disable Plane Display

19. Sketch, constrain, and dimension


the sketch as shown.
20. Click OK

Module 7 | Page 28

2015 PTC

21. In the dashboard, edit the depth


to Both Sides
.
Edit the depth to 8 and click
Complete Feature

22. Select Shading


from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.
23. Orient to the 3D view orientation.
24. Select Reference Part Cutout
from the Trim To Geometry
types drop-down menu in the
Volume Tools group.
25. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 29

Replacing Surfaces and Trimming to Geometry


You can edit mold volumes by replacing surfaces and trimming
them to other geometry.
Replacing surfaces can:
Add volume.
Remove volume.
Add and remove volume
simultaneously.
Trimming to geometry trims
a volume to a specified
reference.
Specify the direction to be
removed.

Figure 2 Mold Volume Before


Surface Replace

Figure 1 Trimming a Volume


to Geometry

Figure 3 Mold Volume After


Surface Replace

Replacing Surfaces
You can replace a single-mold volume surface with a quilt surface by clicking
the Editing group drop-down menu and selecting Replace
. You can use
the Replace option to add volume, remove volume, or simultaneously add
and remove volume. In Figures 2 and 3, the bottom mold volume surface
was replaced with the surface quilt.
By default, the mold volume is consumed by the replaced surface feature.
That is, the mold volume is not visible, but still exists previously in the model
tree.
When using the Replace option, there is one option available in the Replaced
Surface dialog box:
Keep quilt This enables the quilt selected for the replace to remain visible
after the replace is created. In Figure 3, the quilt was not kept after the
surface replace was created.
The Replace option is only available if you are creating a volume or if you are
redefining the volume. The resulting replaced surface feature appears in the
model tree as a feature called Replaced Surface id.

Module 7 | Page 30

2015 PTC

Trimming to Geometry
You can trim surfaces to other geometry in the mold model by selecting Trim
To Geometry
from the Trim To Geometry types drop-down menu in the
Volume Tools group.
The Trim To Geometry option is only available if you are creating a volume
or if you are redefining the volume. The resulting trim to geometry feature
appears in the model tree as a feature called Trim To Geom id. However, the
mold volume for which the trim was applied is also displayed in the model tree.
You can trim to geometry as an alternative to extracting a mold volume up
to a surface. However, trimming to geometry has more powerful capabilities
than just this use. Trimming can only remove volume, not add it.
When trimming surfaces to geometry, you must specify the following:
Ref Type Ref Type specifies what the system uses as the trimming entity.
You can specify one of the following:
Part This uses a part for trimming.
Quilt This uses a quilt for trimming.
Plane This uses a plane surface or datum plane for trimming.
Reference Reference enables you to specify the item whose geometry
will be used for trimming. The item that you can select depends on the Ref
Type that was specified. Essentially, the Ref Type acts like a filter for the
Reference selection.
Direction This enables you to select a trim feature direction. A direction
arrow points in the direction that volume will be trimmed at the reference.
You can select the following references:
Plane Plane makes the direction perpendicular to the specified plane.
Curve, Edge, or Axis These make the direction follow the selected
curve, edge, or axis.
Coordinate System This makes the direction follow the specified axis
of the selected coordinate system.
Trim Type Trim Type enables you to specify which side of the trimming
reference will be used when trimming the mold volume. You can select
either of the following:
Trim By First Reference
surface.

This trims the item by the first reference

This trims the item by the last reference


Trim By Last Reference
surface.
Offset This offsets the trimming reference in the direction currently
specified before trimming the geometry.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 31

PROCEDURE - Replacing Surfaces and Trimming to


Geometry
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Replace_Trim
Task 1:

REPLACE-TRIM.ASM

Trim a slider mold volume to existing geometry.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select REPLACE-TRIM_WRK.
PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Spin the model as shown and
notice that the slider mold volume
passes through the reference
model.
7. In the model tree, select
SLIDER_VOL1, right-click and
select Redefine Mold Volume.
8. Select Trim To Geometry
from the Trim To Geometry types
drop-down menu in the Volume
Tools group.
9. In the Trim To Geom dialog box,
select Quilt as the Ref Type.
10. Select the previously created
quilt as the trimming entity.
11. Select datum plane
MOLD_FRONT from the model
tree as the Direction.
12. Click Flip from the menu
manager until the arrow points
to the left. The volume to the
left of the trimming entity is to be
removed.
13. Click Okay from the menu
manager.

Module 7 | Page 32

2015 PTC

14. Click Apply Changes


from
the Trim To Geom dialog box.
15. Notice that the slider mold
volume has been trimmed at the
trimming reference.

Task 2:

Replace a mold volume surface with a surface quilt.

1. In the model tree, right-click


Skirt Surface id 3055 and select
.
Unhide
2. Orient to the RIGHT view
orientation.
3. Notice that there is a space
between the bottom of the slider
mold volume and the surface.
4. Click the Editing group
drop-down menu and select
Replace

5. Orient to the 3D view orientation.


6. Query-select the bottom surface
of the slider mold volume.

7. Select the large surface quilt.


8. In the Replaced Surface dialog
box, select Keep quilt and click
Define.
9. Click Yes > Done from the menu
manager and click Preview.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 33

10. In the Replaced Surface dialog


box, select Keep quilt and click
Define.
11. Click No > Done from the menu
manager and click OK.
12. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

This completes the procedure.

Module 7 | Page 34

2015 PTC

Sketching Insert Mold Volumes


You can swap inserts out of the same core and cavity in the mold
model to produce similarly shaped parts.
Inserts are used as a cost-saving
measure.
Inserts are used as a consideration
for machining.

Figure 1 Viewing the


Reference Model

Figure 2 Viewing the Completed


Insert

Figure 3 Design Variations That


Can Use Same Core and Cavity

Sketching Insert Mold Volumes


An insert is another mold component that is typically used as a cost-saving
measure. The mold uses the same core and cavity, but one insert is swapped
for another. Different inserts can be used to create different shapes. Thus,
you can use the same mold to create similar parts simply by switching inserts.
In Figure 1, an insert needs to be created for a square cut in the bottom inset
of the reference model. The resulting insert mold volume is shown in Figure
2. However, the model could have a design variation where, rather than a
square cut in the bottom, there is a round cut in the bottom, which is shown in
Figure 3. In this case, you can create a different insert mold volume, while
you use the same core and cavity.
You can also use inserts in areas that are difficult to machine.
Because mold components are ultimately created from mold volumes, you
can use sketch-based features to create insert mold volumes in the mold
model.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 35

PROCEDURE - Sketching Insert Mold Volumes


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Volume_Insert
Task 1:

INSERT.ASM

Create an insert mold volume in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select INSERT_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the square shape cut into
the top of the model.
7. Notice that the INSERT_VOL
mold volume has been started
and is partially filling the square
shape.
8. Right-click INSERT_VOL and
select Redefine Mold Volume.
9. Press ALT, query-select the top
of the existing mold volume,
and click Extrude
Shapes group.

from the

10. Click Project


from the
Sketching group and select
Loop from the Type dialog box.
11. Query-select the main top
surface of the reference model.

Module 7 | Page 36

2015 PTC

12. In the menu manager, click


Next until the square loop is
highlighted and click Accept.
13. Click Close from the Type dialog
box.
14. Click OK

15. Edit the depth to 20 and click


Complete Feature

16. In the model tree, right-click


Surface id 1753 and select
.
Unhide
17. Click the Editing group
drop-down menu and select
Replace

18. Query-select the bottom of the


large, square, extruded volume.
19. In the graphics window, select
Quilt:F14.
20. Click OK from the Replaced
Surface dialog box.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 37

21. In the model tree, right-click


Surface id 2746 and select
.
Unhide
22. Click in the background to
de-select all geometry.
23. Click the Editing group
drop-down menu and select
Replace

24. Spin the model and select the


top of the large, square, extruded
volume.
25. In the graphics window, select
Quilt:F15.
26. Click OK from the Replaced
Surface dialog box.
27. Select INSERT_REF.PRT,
right-click, and select Hide

28. Orient to the Standard


Orientation.
29. Select Reference Part Cutout
from the Trim To Geometry
types drop-down menu in the
Volume Tools group.

30. Select Trim To Geometry


from the Trim To Geometry types
drop-down menu.
31. In the Trim To Geom dialog box,
select Quilt as the Ref Type.
32. Select LIFTER_VOL2 as the
Reference.
33. Select datum plane
MOLD_FRONT as the direction
and click Okay from the menu
manager.
34. Click Apply Changes
from
the Trim To Geom dialog box.

Module 7 | Page 38

2015 PTC

35. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

36. In the model tree, right-click


LIFTER_VOL2 and select Hide
.
37. Spin the model and view the
completed insert mold volume.

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 7 | Page 39

Module 7 | Page 40

2015 PTC

Module

Parting Lines
Module Overview
Parting lines generally define the location where the core, cavity, and other
mold volumes are to be split. In this module, you learn about creating an
automatic parting line using the silhouette curve. You also analyze two
specific options within skirt surface definition: slides and loop selection.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Explain the reason for creating parting lines as well as the two methods
of creation.
Create an automatic parting line using silhouette curves.
Analyze silhouette curve options including slides and loop selection.

2015 PTC

Module 8 | Page 1

Understanding Parting Lines


You can create a parting line to help generate parting surfaces
using the Skirt Surface tool.
Parting line creation methods:
Automatic Silhouette Curve
tool.
Manual Use datum curve
techniques.
Only needed for automatic
parting surface creation.

Figure 1 Silhouette Curve


Parting Line Created

Understanding Parting Lines


Once the reference model and workpiece are assembled into the mold model,
you need to consider where the workpiece will split into the core and cavity to
open the mold. The location where the workpiece splits is the parting surface.
If you create the parting surface automatically using the skirt surface, you
must first create a parting line. The parting line is a collection of datum curves
that is created on the reference model. You can then use the parting line
to create the skirt surface.
There are two different methods that you can use to create the parting line:
tool creates the parting line
Automatic The Silhouette Curve
automatically. A silhouette curve is a datum curve feature that is created
where the draft on the reference model instantaneously changes from
positive to negative when viewed from a certain direction.
Manual You can create datum curves using various modeling techniques
to create the parting line.
You only need to create a parting line if you plan to use the Skirt
Surface

Module 8 | Page 2

tool to create the parting surface.

2015 PTC

Creating an Automatic Parting Line Using


Silhouette Curves
A silhouette curve is created where the draft on the reference
model instantaneously changes from positive to negative when
viewed from the pull direction.
The automatic parting line is
created using silhouette curves.
You must define the following:
Name
Surface references
Direction

Figure 1 Mold Model

Figure 2 Silhouette Curve


Parting Line

Figure 3 Silhouette Curve


Parting Line

Creating an Automatic Parting Line Using Silhouette Curves


You can create an automatic parting line using the Silhouette Curve
tool.
This tool creates the parting line by using silhouette curves. A silhouette
curve is a datum curve feature that is created where the draft on the reference
model instantaneously changes from positive to negative when viewed from
a certain direction. Figure 3 displays the resulting parting line from the mold
model in Figure 1.
From the mold model standpoint, you must define the following when creating
the silhouette curve:
Name This defines the name of the curve as it displays in the model tree.
If desired, you can accept the default name.
Surface Refs This specifies the surfaces on which to create the silhouette
curve. By default, the reference model is defined as the surface references.
Thus, the silhouette curve is created on the reference model. If the mold
model contains more than one reference model, you must specify the
2015 PTC

Module 8 | Page 3

surface references to be used, and the surface references must all be


selected on the same solid or reference model.
Direction This defines the direction for creating the silhouette curve. By
default, the specified direction is the pull direction, although you can specify
a different direction using any of the following options:
Plane Plane makes the direction perpendicular to the specified plane.
Curve, Edge, or Axis These make the direction follow the selected
curve, edge, or axis.
Coordinate System This makes the direction follow the specified axis
of the selected coordinate system.
In Figure 2, notice that the silhouette curve is created at all draft transitions
from the pull direction.

Module 8 | Page 4

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating an Automatic Parting Line


Using Silhouette Curves
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Parting-Line_Automatic
Task 1:

AUTO-PART-LINE.ASM

Create an automatic parting line in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select the AUTO-PART-LINE_
WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice that the reference model
contains a hole in its top surface.
7. Click Silhouette Curve
from
the Design Features group.
8. Click OK from the Silhouette
Curve dialog box.

9. Select the AUTO-PART-LINE_


REF.PRT, right-click, and select
Hide

10. Spin the model, and notice that


the silhouette curve is comprised
of two loops.
11. Click Close
from the Quick
Access toolbar.

2015 PTC

Module 8 | Page 5

Task 2:

Create an automatic parting line in a mold model.

1. Click Open
and double-click
COVER-PART-LINE.ASM.
2. Select the COVER-PART-LINE_
WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice that the reference model
contains four circular holes and
one rectangular hole.
7. Click Silhouette Curve

8. Click OK from the Silhouette


Curve dialog box.

9. Zoom in on the top of the model


and notice that there is a curve
around each hole in the top
surface.

10. Orient to the 3D view orientation.


11. Notice that there is another curve
around the entire bottom edge of
the reference model.
12. Notice that there is only one
silhouette curve feature created
in the model tree.

Module 8 | Page 6

2015 PTC

13. Orient to the FRONT view


orientation.
from the
14. Select Hidden Line
Display Style types drop-down
menu.
15. Notice that there is a curve
created at every location
where the draft instantaneously
changes from positive to
negative.
16. Select Shading
from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 8 | Page 7

Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Slides


The Slides option enables you to specify mold volumes that
already account for undercut geometry zones in the reference
model.
The system excludes silhouette
curve creation at slides.

Figure 1 Mold Model and


Slider Mold Volumes

Figure 2 Silhouette Curve without


Slides Specified

Figure 3 Silhouette Curve


with Slides Specified

Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Slides


Recall that a silhouette curve is created in a mold model where the draft
on the reference model instantaneously changes from positive to negative
when viewed from the pull direction. Because undercut areas can also cause
draft to instantaneously change, the system may also create the silhouette
curve along undercut geometry zones.
The Slides option enables you to specify mold volumes that already account
for undercut geometry zones in the reference model. When mold volumes
are specified, the system automatically excludes these unnecessary edges
and creates correct parting curves.

Module 8 | Page 8

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options:


Slides
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Parting-Line_Slides
Task 1:

CURVE-SLIDES.ASM

Specify mold volumes to exclude undercut areas during silhouette


curve creation.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select the CURVE-SLIDES_
WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice that the mold model
contains three slider mold
volumes.
7. Click Silhouette Curve
from
the Design Features group.
8. Click Preview from the Silhouette
Curve dialog box.
9. Notice that the system attempts
to create the same silhouette
curves for the undercut geometry
that the slider mold volumes
already created.

10. In the Silhouette Curve dialog


box, select Slides and click
Define.
11. Press CTRL and select the three
slider mold volumes.
12. Click Done Refs > Done/Return
from the menu manager.

2015 PTC

Module 8 | Page 9

13. Click OK from the Silhouette


Curve dialog box.
14. Notice that the system no longer
creates silhouette curves for the
undercut geometry.

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 10

2015 PTC

Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options: Loop


Selection
The Loop Selection option enables you to control the location of
curve segments in reference to the part edges and specify which
loops are included in the curve.
Loop selection:
Loops created at every
shutoff location.
Status options:
Included
Excluded
Chain selection options:
Upper
Lower
Single

Figure 1 Included Versus


Excluded Loops

Figure 2 Upper Versus Lower Chains

Including and Excluding Silhouette Curve Loops


During silhouette curve creation, the system may create curves along edges
that you do not want included. You can selectively remove curves along
edges that you do not want curves created for using the Loop Selection
option in the Silhouette Curve dialog box.
Selecting the Loop Selection option causes the Loop Selection dialog box
to appear. The Loops tab in the Loop Selection dialog box lists the loops
of curves which comprise the silhouette curve, and whether their status is
Included or Excluded. When you select a loop in the dialog box, it highlights
in the mold model.
Loops are typically created at every location in the mold model where there is
a shutoff. A shutoff is any surface where the mold core and cavity contact.
When the mold closes the core and cavity it creates a seal that shuts off
that area of the mold. One loop typically is created along the exterior of the
reference model. Other loops are created at each interior hole or cut. Loops
are also created at areas of undercut geometry.
Loops are, by default, included in the final silhouette curve, although you can
exclude any loop from the final silhouette curve. The most common reason
loops are excluded is because the shutoff at that specific location is being
2015 PTC

Module 8 | Page 11

formed by a slider or saddle. In Figure 1, the two loops around the opening
are excluded.
Another way to exclude loops created by undercuts is to use the
Slides Silhouette Curve option.

Specifying Edges for Silhouette Curve Creation


When the system encounters a vertical surface or a surface that has no draft
for which a silhouette curve loop is to be included, the system may select the
wrong edge to create the silhouette curve along. In most cases you can
change which edge to create the silhouette curve along. The following status
options are available:
Upper The chain is currently located at the uppermost edges of a vertical
surface. The upper edge is higher relative to the positive Z-axis, or pull
direction, as shown in the left image of Figure 2. When the chain is
specified as upper, the shutoff effectively causes the mold feature to occur
in the core mold component.
Lower The chain is currently located at the lowermost edges of a vertical
surface. The lower edge is lower relative to the positive Z-axis, or pull
direction, as shown in the right image of Figure 2. When the chain is
specified as lower, the shutoff effectively causes the mold feature to occur
in the cavity mold component.
Single You cannot move the chain for a Single location because the
edges that the chain lies on are associated with a drafted surface.
The Chains tab in the Loop Selection dialog box displays both the chain
number, and its status. The chain number is displayed as A-B, where A is
the corresponding loop number from the Loops tab that the chain belongs
to, and B is an incremental number for multiple chains belonging to a single
loop, starting with 0. For example, if there are three chains belonging to loop
number 1, then the three chains are numbered 1-0, 1-1, and 1-2.

Module 8 | Page 12

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Silhouette Curve Options:


Loop Selection
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Parting-Line_Loop
Task 1:

LOOP-SELECTION.ASM

Exclude loops of a silhouette curve.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. In the model tree, right-click
LOOP-SELECTION_WRK.PRT
and select Hide

from
3. Click Silhouette Curve
the Design Features group.
4. Click Preview from the Silhouette
Curve dialog box.
5. Notice the silhouette curve that
is to be created.
6. In the Silhouette Curve dialog
box, select Loop Selection and
click Define.
7. Notice that the Loop Selection
dialog box contains three loops.
Select loop number 1.
8. Notice that this outer loop
highlights blue in the graphics
window. We want to keep this
loop.
9. In the Loop Selection dialog box,
select loop number 2.
10. Notice that this loop is on the
right side of the opening.
11. You later handle this opening
using a method other than
silhouette curves, so it needs to
be excluded from the silhouette
curve.
12. In the Loop Selection dialog box,
click Exclude.

2015 PTC

Module 8 | Page 13

13. In the Loop Selection dialog box,


select loop number 3 and notice
that this loop is on the left side
of the opening.
14. Again, you handle this opening
using a method other than
silhouette curves, so it needs to
be excluded from the silhouette
curve.
15. In the Loop Selection dialog box,
click Exclude.
Task 2:

Switch the location of chains for a loop in a silhouette curve.

1. In the Loop Selection dialog box,


select the Chains tab.
Select chain number 1-0.
Notice that its status is
Single. This chain is on a
drafted surface and cannot be
changed.

2. In the Loop Selection dialog box,


select chain number 1-1.
Press CTRL and select chain
number 1-2.
Notice that both of their
Statuses are Upper.
Notice that both chains are to
be created on the upper edges
of the vertical surfaces.
3. In the Loop Selection dialog box,
click Lower to switch both chains
to the lower edges of the vertical
surfaces.
Click OK.
4. Click OK from the Silhouette
Curve dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

Module 8 | Page 14

2015 PTC

Module

Skirt Surfaces
Module Overview
A parting surface is a surface feature that you can use to split a workpiece or
an existing volume, including surfaces of one or more reference parts. You
can create parting surfaces automatically by using the skirt surface technique.
In this module, you learn how to create a skirt surface, and examine each of
the different options available during skirt surface creation.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Explain the reason for creating parting surfaces as well as the two methods
of creation.
Create a skirt surface.
Analyze various skirt surface options, including extending curves, tangent
conditions, extension directions, and shutoff extensions.

2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 1

Understanding Parting Surfaces


You can create parting surfaces to define where mold volumes
are to be split.
Parting surface creation methods:
Automatic Skirt Surface
tool
Manual Use surfacing
techniques

Figure 1 Parting Surface


Created Automatically

Figure 2 Parting Surface


Created Manually

Understanding Parting Surfaces


The location where the workpiece splits is the parting surface. The parting
surface is generally perpendicular to the pull direction and lies between
the parting line edges of the reference model and the outside walls of the
workpiece.
There are two different methods that you can use to create the parting
surface:
Automatic The Skirt Surface
tool creates the parting surface
automatically. If you use the skirt surface tool, you must first create a
parting line to use.
Manual You can create the parting surface using basic and advanced
surface creation techniques.

Parting Surface Criteria


You must remember the following criteria when creating parting surfaces:
A parting surface must intersect the workpiece or mold volume completely.
You can merge multiple surfaces together.
A parting surface cannot intersect itself.
You can use any surface as a parting surface as long as the first two
criteria are met.
Parting surface features are created at the assembly level in the mold
model.
Module 9 | Page 2

2015 PTC

Creating a Skirt Surface


You can use a skirt surface to automatically create the mold
model parting surface.
The skirt surface is created using
specified datum curves.
The silhouette curve parting line
is usually selected.
Inner holes in the reference model
are filled using silhouette curve
loops.
Outer curve loops are extended to
the workpiece boundaries.
Numerous options available to
account for different types of
model geometry.

Figure 1 Viewing the Silhouette


Curve Parting Line

Figure 2 Viewing the Completed


Skirt Surface

Creating a Skirt Surface


You can create the parting surface for a mold model by using Parting
Surface
in the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group. The system can
help you automatically create a parting surface by using the Skirt Surface
tool. This tool helps you automatically create a parting surface by creating
a skirt surface. The skirt surface can be considered as a super feature. It
contains numerous options that you can define to help account for different
types of model geometry.
The parting surface is ultimately used to split the mold model into the mold
core and mold cavity. You can think of the parting surface as the location of
all metal-to-metal contact between the mold core and cavity.
To create the skirt surface you must specify the curves that the system should
use. You can specify curves in any of the following ways:
One By One Enables you to select individual curves or edges.
Curve Chain Enables you to select a chain of curves.
2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 3

Feat Curves Enables you to select all curves that belong to the specified
feature.
The skirt surface is usually created by specifying an existing parting line
silhouette curve. The silhouette curve is selected using the Feat Curves
method of specifying curves. However, if you do not want to use the entire
silhouette curve, or if you want to use the silhouette curve in conjunction with
other datum curves, you can use the Curve Chain or One By One options.
The Ref Model, Workpiece, and Direction must also be defined to create the
skirt surface. However, if the process workflow has been followed, these
items should have already been automatically defined for you. The Ref
Model is the reference model used in the mold model, the Workpiece is the
workpiece used in the mold model, and the Direction is the pull direction of
the mold model.
Once you have specified these items, the system classifies each closed
loop of curves into one of two types:
Inner loops Loops that are filled by the skirt surface.
Outer loops Loops that the skirt surface extends outward through.
Usually, the system is able to automatically determine the loop classifications.
Once the classifications are made, the system automatically creates the skirt
parting surface feature by doing the following:
It fills the inner holes (shutoffs) in the reference model using the inner
loops from the Silhouette curve or other selected datum curve. In Figure
2, all five interior shutoffs have been filled using loops from the specified
silhouette curve.
It extends the outer loops of the Silhouette curve or other datum curve to
the boundaries of the workpiece. In Figure 2, the skirt surface extends out
to the boundaries of the workpiece.
Similar to mold volumes, you can rename the parting surface by starting
the Parting Surface tool, right-clicking, and selecting Properties, or clicking
Properties

Module 9 | Page 4

from the Controls group.

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating a Skirt Surface


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Skirt-Surface
Task 1:

SKIRT-SURFACE.ASM

Create a skirt surface in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select the SKIRT-SURFACE_
WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Select the silhouette curve that
has already been created.
7. Notice that the silhouette curve
consists of six loops one
around the entire reference
model and one loop each for
each interior shutoff.
8. Click Parting Surface
group.
9. Click Skirt Surface

from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume


from the Surfacing group.

10. Select the silhouette curve


and click Done from the menu
manager.
11. Click OK from the Skirt Surface
dialog box.
12. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

13. Notice that all five interior


silhouette curve loops have been
filled by the skirt surface.
14. Notice also that the skirt surface
has been extended from the
outer silhouette curve loop to the
sides of the workpiece.

2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 5

15. Spin the model so that you


can view the underside of the
reference model.

Task 2:

Edit the silhouette curve chain status to modify the skirt surface.

1. Zoom in on the interior shutoffs.


2. Notice that the skirt surface for
each shutoff is located on the
outer reference model surface.
3. Press CTRL+D to orient to the
Standard Orientation.

4. Edit the definition of SILH_CURVE_1.


5. Click Suspend All from the menu manager to temporarily suspend
the skirt surface feature.
6. In the Silhouette Curve dialog box, double-click Loop Selection.
7. In the Loop Selection dialog box,
select the Chains tab.
Select chain 2-1, press CTRL,
and select chains 4-1, 5-1, and
6-1.
Click Lower to switch the
status of the four loops.
Click OK.
8. Click OK from the Silhouette
Curve dialog box.

Module 9 | Page 6

2015 PTC

9. Zoom in on the interior shutoffs.


10. Notice that the skirt surface is
located on the inner reference
model surface.

11. Spin the model so that you


can view the underside of the
reference model and inspect the
skirt surface.

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 7

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend Curves


The Extend Curves option provides a further level of control
that enables you to exclude curves from being extended during
skirt surface creation.
By default, all selected curves are
included.
The Extend Curves option enables
you to exclude curve segments.

Figure 1 Default Skirt Surface

Figure 2 Curve Segments Excluded

Figure 3 Additional Curve


Segment Excluded

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend Curves


By default, all curves selected for the skirt surface are extended either inward
or outward to create the surface. The Extend Curves option provides a further
level of control to exclude curves from being extended.
The Extend Curves tab in the Extension Control dialog box contains two
columns:
Include Curve Specifies which curve segments are extended in the skirt
surface.
Exclude Curve Specifies which curve segments are not extended in the
skirt surface.
Every curve specified for the skirt surface is broken up into segments.
Each segment is displayed in the Extend Curves tab. By default, all curve
segments are located in the Include Curve column of the tab, meaning that
they are all extended. You can exclude curve segments from being extended
by moving them over to the Exclude Curve column of the tab. When you
place the cursor over a given curve segment it highlights in the graphics
window so you can determine where it is located in the reference model.
When creating a skirt surface, you can either select an entire silhouette
curve and then exclude curve segments as desired, or you can simply
select the desired curves one by one for the skirt surface definition. Either
way, you achieve the same resultant skirt surface. The method you use is
Module 9 | Page 8

2015 PTC

determined by what is most efficient. For example, if there are 20 segments


in a silhouette curve and you need 18 of them for the skirt surface, it would
be most efficient to select the entire silhouette curve and then exclude the
two unneeded curve segments. Conversely, if you only need 2 of the 20
curve segments, it would be more efficient to individually select the two
desired curves, rather than selecting the entire curve and then excluding
the unneeded 18 curve segments.

2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extend


Curves
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Skirt-Surface_Extend
Task 1:

EXTEND-CURVES.ASM

Exclude curves from a skirt surface in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Notice the silhouette curve that
has already been created.

3. Click Parting Surface


from
the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
4. Click Skirt Surface
the Surfacing group.

tool from

5. Select the silhouette curve


and click Done from the menu
manager.
6. Click Preview from the Skirt
Surface dialog box.
7. Click Repaint

8. Notice that the surface extends


out from all curve segments of
the silhouette curve.

9. In the Skirt Surface dialog box,


double-click Extension.
10. In the Extension Control dialog
box, select Curve 213.
11. Notice that the curve segment
highlights in the graphics
window.

Module 9 | Page 10

2015 PTC

12. In the Extension Control dialog


box, press SHIFT and select
Curve 216.
13. Notice that all four curve
segments are selected and
highlight in the graphics window.
14. Click Exclude Curve
to
exclude these curve segments.

15. Click OK from the Extension


Control dialog box.
16. Click OK from the Skirt Surface
dialog box.
17. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

18. Notice that the skirt surface is


not created through the excluded
curve segments.
19. Edit the definition of the Skirt
Surface id 223.
20. In the Skirt Surface dialog box,
double-click Extension.
21. In the Extension Control dialog
box, select Curve 213 and click
Include Curve
.
Click OK.
22. Click OK from the Skirt Surface
dialog box.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 11

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent


Conditions
The Tangent Conditions option enables you to specify surfaces
on the reference model to which the resulting skirt surface must
be tangent.
Specify which surfaces the skirt
surface must be tangent to.
You can exclude adjacent curve
segments from the tangent
condition.

Figure 1 No Tangent Condition


Applied to Skirt Surface

Figure 2 Tangent Condition


Applied to Skirt Surface

Figure 3 Curves Excluded from


Tangent Condition

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Tangent Conditions


The Tangent Conditions option enables you to specify surfaces on the
reference model to which the resulting skirt surface must be tangent when
extending through the parting line curves.
You must specify the following when defining tangent conditions for the skirt
surface:
Tangent surfaces Specify the reference model surfaces adjacent to the
parting curve to which the skirt surface must be tangent.
Include Curve The skirt surface must extend through these curves
tangent to the adjacent surfaces. By default, all curves adjacent to the
selected surfaces are included.
Exclude Curve The tangent condition is not applied to the curves in this
column of the Tangent Conditions tab.
In Figure 1, no tangent conditions have been applied to the resulting skirt
surface. In Figure 2, the tangent condition has been applied to all outer
Module 9 | Page 12

2015 PTC

surfaces of the reference model. Consequently, the skirt surface extends


through the parting line tangent to the adjacent surfaces. However, in Figure
3, all but the left and right curves have been excluded from the tangent
condition. As a result, the skirt surface is only tangent to the left and right
reference model surfaces.

2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 13

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Skirt Surface Options:


Tangent Conditions
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Skirt-Surface_Tangent
Task 1:

TANGENT-COND.ASM

Create an automatic parting surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select TANGENT-COND_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Click Parting Surface
group.
7. Click Skirt Surface
Surfacing group.

from the Parting Surface & Mold Volume

from the

8. Select silhouette curve


PART-LINE and click Done
from the menu manager.
9. Click OK from the Skirt Surface
dialog box.
10. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

11. Notice that the parting surface


extends normal to the workpiece
boundary.

Module 9 | Page 14

2015 PTC

Task 2:

Set tangent conditions for the skirt surface.

1. Edit the definition of Skirt


Surface id 388.
2. In the Skirt Surface dialog box,
double-click Extension.
3. In the Extension Control
dialog box, select the Tangent
Conditions tab.
4. In the Tangent Conditions tab,
click Select Tangent Surfaces
.
5. Press CTRL and select the eight
outer surfaces that are adjacent
to the silhouette curve.
6. Click OK from the Select dialog box.
7. Click OK from the Extension Control dialog box.
8. Click Preview from the Skirt
Surface dialog box.
9. Spin the model and notice that
the skirt surface now extends
tangent to the surfaces adjacent
to the silhouette curve.
10. Press CTRL+D to orient to the
Standard Orientation.
11. In the Skirt Surface dialog box,
double-click Extension and
select the Tangent Conditions
tab.
12. In the Extension Control dialog
box, click Select Included
Curves
.
Press CTRL and select the six
curves highlighted green.
Click OK from the Select
dialog box.
and
Click Exclude Curve
click OK.

2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 15

13. Click OK from the Skirt Surface


dialog box.
14. Spin the model and notice
that, while the skirt surface
still extends from the selected
curves, it is only tangent to the
curves included in the tangent
conditions.

This completes the procedure.

Module 9 | Page 16

2015 PTC

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension


Directions
You can add or modify the direction that the skirt surface
extends from the silhouette curve segments.
Extension directions can
significantly alter the shape
of the skirt surface.
Arrows denote direction at each
segment vertex.
Orange Default direction
Cyan User-defined direction
Red Tangent direction
Select location and direction
reference.
Figure 1 Extension Direction
Modified

Figure 2 Viewing Default


Extension Directions

Figure 3 Viewing User-Defined


Extension Directions

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: Extension Directions


By default, when the skirt surface extends from a silhouette curve, it extends
normal to the curve. The direction of extension is defined at every curve
segment endpoint. If the directions at the curve endpoints overlap, the skirt
surface will fail.
You can modify the direction of extension for the curve endpoints in the
Extension Directions tab of the Extension Control dialog box. This enables
you to significantly change the resulting shape of the skirt surface. For
example, in Figure 1, the extension directions for the left side of the skirt
surface have been modified, causing the resulting shape to be different.
When you select the Extension Directions tab, the extension directions for
each of the curve segment endpoints displays in the graphics window.
Consider the following points regarding extension directions:
2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 17

Default extension directions display with orange arrows, as shown in


Figure 2.
Extension directions that you have modified or added display with cyan
arrows, as shown in Figure 3.
If you apply tangent conditions to curve segments for the skirt surface, the
extension directions display with red arrows.

Modifying and Adding Extension Directions


You can modify extension directions as a means to solve a failing skirt
surface, or you can modify them simply to modify the shape of the resulting
parting surface. You can also add additional extension directions.
To modify or add an extension direction, you must specify the following:
Location You can either select an existing included extend curve endpoint
or create a datum point at a new location where you want to add an
extension direction.
Direction reference This specifies the direction in which the skirt surface
will be extended. You can select any of the following references:
Plane The skirt surface is extended perpendicular to the plane. You
can select either datum planes or planar surfaces.
Curve, Edge, or Axis The skirt surface is extended along the direction
of the specified curve, edge, or axis.
Coordinate System The skirt surface is extended along the specified
coordinate system axis, which you must specify.
Each added or modified extension direction displays in the Extension
Directions tab as a point set. For each defined point set, you can perform the
following operations:
Remove This enables you to remove the point set.
Redefine This enables you to select a different location for the point set.
Direction This enables you to select a different direction reference.
You can also add new point sets.

Module 9 | Page 18

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Skirt Surface Options:


Extension Directions
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Skirt-Surface_Direction
Task 1:

EXTEND-DIR.ASM

Modify the extension directions of a skirt surface in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select EXTEND-DIR_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Click Parting Surface

and click Skirt Surface

7. Select EXTEND-DIR_WRK.PRT, select the silhouette curve, and click


Done from the menu manager.
8. Click Preview from the Skirt Surface dialog box.
9. Notice that the skirt surface fails.
10. Also notice the warning message in the Message Log.

11. In the Skirt Surface dialog box,


double-click Extension.
12. Notice the warning message
and notice where the problem
is occurring based on the
highlighted curve segments.
13. Click OK from the Warning dialog
box.

14. Select the Extension Directions


tab.
15. Notice the default direction
arrows at the problem area at
the lower right are pointing in two
different directions.

2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 19

16. In the Extension Directions tab,


click Add.
Select the vertex shown.
Click Done from the menu
manager.

17. Select the right workpiece


surface and click Okay from the
menu manager.
18. Notice the new user-defined
direction at the vertex.

19. Click OK from the Extension


Control dialog box.
20. Click Preview from the Skirt
Surface dialog box and rotate
the model to observe the parting
surface.

Task 2:

Add an extension direction to a skirt surface.

1. From the In Graphics toolbar,


click Saved Orientations
and select BACK.
2. Notice that the bottom of the skirt
surface curves upward.
3. Click Saved Orientations
and select 3D.
4. Enable Plane Display

Module 9 | Page 20

and Point Display

2015 PTC

5. In the Skirt Surface dialog box,


double-click Extension and
select the Extension Directions
tab.
Click Add.
Prehighlight datum point PNT0
and select it.
Click Done from the menu
manager.
6. Prehighlight datum plane
EXTENSION_DIR, select it,
and click Okay from the menu
manager.
7. Notice the new user-defined
direction and click OK from the
Extension Control dialog box.
8. Click OK from the Skirt Surface
dialog box.
9. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

10. Spin the model and observe the


skirt surface.
11. Disable Plane Display
Point Display

and

12. Orient to the BACK view


orientation and notice that the
surface no longer curves upward.

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 21

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff


Extension
You can specify a location other than the workpiece boundaries
that the skirt surface extends to.
ShutOff Extension options:
ShutOff Dist Uniform offset
Boundary Sketch or select
ShutOff Plane Shutoff extension
extends up to the shutoff plane
Draft Angle Applies draft to
Z-direction shutoff extension
surfaces
Figure 1 Shutoff Distance
Specified for Shutoff Extension

Figure 2 Selected Boundary


Shutoff Extension

Figure 3 Sketched Boundary


Shutoff Extension

Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff Extension


By default, the outer loops of a specified silhouette curve are extended to the
boundaries of the workpiece. This may cause an undesirable shape in the
resulting core and cavity mold components.
You can specify a shutoff extension to stop the skirt surface from extending
all the way out to the workpiece boundaries by using the ShutOff Ext option
in the Skirt Surface dialog box. The ShutOff Ext option enables you to
specify the amount of extension toward the workpiece boundaries that the
skirt surface will undergo before stopping, extending in the pull direction,
and finally stopping at the workpiece boundaries. There are two methods
available for specifying the shutoff extension location:
ShutOff Dist Specifies a uniform offset value around the silhouette curve
perimeter that the skirt surface will extend. In Figure 1, a shutoff distance
of 2 was specified.
Module 9 | Page 22

2015 PTC

Boundary Enables you to specify your own boundary that the skirt
surface will extend out to. You can use either of the following two methods
to specify the boundary:
Select Enables you to select an existing sketch as the boundary. In
Figure 2, the sketch created on the top surface of the workpiece was
selected as the boundary.
Sketch Enables you to sketch the boundary on-the-fly by specifying
the sketch plane, reference plane, and reference direction. In Figure 3,
the boundary was sketched on the top surface of the workpiece.
Regardless of which boundary method is used, the boundary must form
a closed loop. It is not necessary for the boundary to be located on a
specific sketching plane or even a sketching plane that is perpendicular to
the pull direction. However, the boundary is ultimately extended in the pull
direction, so if the boundary is created on a plane that is not normal to the
pull direction, you may not get the expected result.
When the skirt surface extends outward from the silhouette curve, it stops
either at the workpiece boundaries or a shutoff extension, whichever it
encounters first. If the selected boundary falls outside of the workpiece
boundaries, the skirt surface will stop at the workpiece boundaries. In Figure
3, only one of the four sides of the sketched square boundary falls within
the workpiece boundaries. Hence, the skirt surface stops extending at the
workpiece boundaries on three sides, and at the sketched boundary on the
fourth side.

Specifying the ShutOff Plane


The ShutOff Plane option is used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension
option. The shutoff plane is the planar reference that the shutoff extension
extends to. The shutoff extension extends in the positive or negative Z-axis
(pull direction) up to the shutoff plane and finally extends outward again to
the workpiece boundaries. The shutoff plane specified in all three figures
is the one that is displayed.
While the ShutOff Plane is optional in the Skirt Surface dialog box, it is a
required reference if a shutoff extension is defined. Without the shutoff plane
defined, the shutoff extension does not extend at all in the Z-axis, and
therefore is not used.
The following rules apply to the shutoff plane reference specified:

The reference you specify must be planar.


There can be only one shutoff plane specified.
The shutoff plane must be normal to the pull direction.
The shutoff plane may be above the skirt surface. However, the resulting
extension may not create valid geometry for a mold parting line.

Specifying the Draft Angle


The Draft Angle option is also used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension
option, although it is not a requirement. The draft angle option drafts the
Z-direction surfaces of the shutoff extension by the specified draft angle
value. You might want to apply a draft angle to these surfaces to help with
wear in the resulting mold core and cavity. Note that you can only specify a
positive draft angle. The draft angle specified in all three figures is 6.
2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 23

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Skirt Surface Options: ShutOff


Extension
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Skirt-Surface_ShutOff
Task 1:

SHUTOFF-EXT.ASM

Create a shutoff extension by specifying an offset distance.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:
2. Select SHUTOFF-EXT_WRK.
PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the skirt surface shape.
7. Edit the definition of Skirt
Surface id 1501.
8. In the Skirt Surface dialog box,
double-click ShutOff Ext.
9. In the menu manager, click
ShutOff Dist, type 2 as the
value, and press ENTER.
10. Click Preview from the Skirt
Surface dialog box and click
Repaint

11. Notice that there is no difference


in the skirt surface shape.
12. In the Skirt Surface dialog box,
double-click ShutOff Plane.
Select datum plane SHUTOFF
and click Done/Return from
the menu manager.
Click Preview.
and notice
13. Click Repaint
that the shutoff extension now
extends to the shutoff plane.

Module 9 | Page 24

2015 PTC

14. In the Skirt Surface dialog box,


double-click Draft Angle.
Type 6 as the value, press
ENTER, and click Preview.
15. Click Repaint
and notice that
the shutoff extension surfaces
have been drafted.

Task 2:

Select a new shutoff extension boundary.

1. Double-click ShutOff Ext.


2. In the menu manager, click
Boundary > Select > One By
One.
3. Query-select the entire
SHUTOFF_BOUNDARY sketch
and click Done from the menu
manager.

4. Click Preview from the Skirt


Surface dialog box and click
Repaint

5. Notice the new shutoff extension


shape.
6. Notice that the shutoff extension
still extends to the shutoff plane.
7. Notice that the shutoff extension
surfaces are still drafted.

2015 PTC

Module 9 | Page 25

Task 3:

Sketch a new shutoff extension boundary.

1. Double-click ShutOff Ext.


2. In the menu manager, click
Boundary > Sketch.
3. Select the top workpiece surface
as the sketch plane.
4. Click Okay > Default from the
menu manager.
5. Select datum plane
MOLD_FRONT and the right
workpiece surface as references,
and click Close from the
References dialog box.
6. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:
.
7. Select Center Rectangle
from the Rectangle types
drop-down menu and sketch,
constrain, and dimension the
sketch, as shown.

8. Click OK

9. Click OK from the Skirt Surface


dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

Module 9 | Page 26

2015 PTC

Module

10

Parting Surface Creation


Module Overview
In addition to using the Skirt Surface tool to help you automatically
generate the parting surface, you can also use the Shadow Surface tool
to automatically create a parting surface. You can also use a series of
other tools to manually create the different parts of the parting surface. The
different parts can be merged together to form the final parting surface.
In this module, you learn about the shadow surface and various manual
parting surface tools.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Explain the various tools you can use to edit and manipulate surfaces.
Merge surfaces.
Create a shadow surface.
Create a parting surface manually.
Create saddle shutoff surfaces.
Create fill surfaces.
Extend curves.
Fill loops.
Create shut offs by closing all loops, by selecting loops, and by capping
surfaces.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 1

Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation


Tools
When working with surfaces, it is often necessary to edit and
manipulate quilts to achieve your desired design intent.
Tools include:
Extend
Trim
Copy and Paste
Offset
Mirror
Merge
Figure 1 Extending a Surface to Plane

Figure 2 Trimming a Quilt


using Geometry

Figure 3 Mirroring a Quilt

Analyzing Surface Editing and Manipulation Tools


When working with surfaces, it is often necessary to edit and manipulate
quilts to achieve your desired design intent. You can use the following tools
to edit and manipulate surfaces.
Surface editing and manipulation tools are covered in greater detail
in PTC's surfacing courses.

Extending Surfaces
You can extend a quilt using either of the following methods:
Extend Original Surface
Extends the surface boundary edge chain
along the original surface. This option has three additional options that
determine how the extension is created:
Same Creates the extension of the same type as the original surface
(for example, plane, cylinder, cone, or spline surface). The original
surface is extended past its selected boundary edge chain, and does
not create an additional surface patch. This is the default extend option.
Tangent Creates the extension as a ruled surface that is tangent to the
original surface. With this option an additional surface patch is created.
Module 10 | Page 2

2015 PTC

Approximate Creates the extension as a boundary blend between the


boundary edges of the original surface and the edges of the extension.
This method is useful when extending the surface up to a vertex that
does not lie along a straight edge. With this option an additional surface
patch is created.
Extend Surface To Plane
Extends the boundary edge chain up to
a specified plane in the direction normal to this plane. With this option an
additional surface patch is created.

Trimming Surfaces
A surface trim is analogous to a solid cut, except that it trims away a portion
of a surface. You can create a surface trim as an extrude, revolve, sweep,
blend, and so on. You can also trim a selected surface quilt using other
geometry such as planes, quilts, and curves or edges.
Once you have specified the surface to be trimmed and the entity to do the
trimming, you must specify which side is to be kept. You can opt to keep one
side, the other side, or both sides.

Copying and Pasting Surfaces


Copying and pasting surfaces enables you to create an overlay of a surface
so that you can then perform manipulations to the copied surface. You can
copy and paste any surface or surface set, either from a quilt or a solid. You
can use either CTRL+C and CTRL+V or the Copy
and Paste
icons
from the Operations group in the ribbon. You should only use the Copy
functionality in situations where you do not have proper references to create
the parting surfaces. The copy functionality can result in a lot of surface
features, especially when you are working with a complex design.

Offsetting Surfaces
You can create a surface quilt offset a distance value from another quilt or a
solid surface. The offset surface remains dependent on the original surface.
When offsetting surfaces, you can specify the fit type as either Normal to
Surface, Automatic Fit, or Controlled Fit.

Mirroring Surfaces
You can transform a surface quilt by mirroring it. To mirror a quilt, select the
quilt and click Mirror
, specifying a reference plane for the mirror. A new
surface feature is created.

Merging Surfaces
You can merge two or more intersecting or adjacent quilts to create surfaces
with 2-sided edges. Merging surfaces is covered more in depth in other topics.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Surface Editing and


Manipulation Tools
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Surface_Manipulate
Task 1:

EDIT-MANIPULATE.PRT

Extend a surface in a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:
2. Select feature Revolve 1 and
select the top surface edge.
3. Click Extend
group.

from the Editing

4. In the dashboard, click Extend


Surface To Plane
and select
datum plane EXTEND from the
model tree.

5. Click Complete Feature


from the dashboard.
6. De-select all geometry.

Task 2:

Trim a surface in a part model.

1. Select Revolve 1.
2. Select Quilt:F5.
3. Click Trim
group.

from the Editing

4. Select the projected curve.

Module 10 | Page 4

2015 PTC

5. Click Complete Feature

6. De-select all geometry.

Task 3:

Mirror the quilt in the part model.

1. Select Revolve 1 and select


Quilt:F5.
from the Editing
2. Click Mirror
group and select datum plane
MIRROR.
.

3. Click Complete Feature


4. De-select all geometry.
Task 4:

Offset a quilt in the part model.

1. Select Revolve 1 and select


Quilt:F5.
2. Click Offset
group.

from the Editing

3. In the dashboard, type 40 as the


offset value and press ENTER.
4. Click Complete Feature

5. De-select all geometry.


Task 5:

Copy and paste a portion of a surface quilt.

1. Disable Plane Display

2. Edit the selection filter to


Geometry.
3. Query-select the lowest surface
of the mirrored quilt.
4. Press CTRL and query-select the
highest surface of the mirrored
quilt.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 5

5. Press CTRL+C to copy the


surfaces and press CTRL+V to
paste the surfaces.
6. Click Complete Feature

7. In the model tree, select Mirror


1, right-click, and select Hide
.

This completes the procedure.

Module 10 | Page 6

2015 PTC

Merging Surfaces
Merging a quilt is required for operations such as creating solids
from quilts.
Colors:
Orange = one-sided
edges.
Purple = two-sided
edges.
Merge makes one-sided
edges two-sided.
Merge options:
Intersect
Join

Figure 1 Surface Merge Keep Options

Figure 2 Surfaces Edge


Display of Separate Quilts

Figure 3 Surface Edge Display


of Merged Quilts

Merging Surfaces
You can merge two or more intersecting or adjacent quilts. Merging a quilt
makes it selectable as a single entity for other operations, and is required for
operations such as creating solids from quilts.
Remember the following:
Surfaces are shown using orange and purple highlighting on the edges.
Orange denotes outer or one-sided edges.
Purple denotes inner or two-sided edges because they border two surface
patches.
Therefore:
Merging a surface results in the creation of two-sided edges from one-sided
edges. In Figure 2, the adjacent quilt surface edges are separate,
one-sided edges, as they display in orange. In Figure 3, the quilts have
been merged to form two-sided, purple edges.
2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 7

Merged surface edges appear in purple.

Merge Options
There are two types of merge operations, used for different surface geometry:
Intersect Primarily used for intersecting quilts, when a trimming effect is
desired, although it can be used on adjacent quilts. The Intersect option
provides up to two flip arrows, enabling four possible geometry outcomes,
as shown in Figure 1. Intersect is the default merge option.
Join Recommended for use on adjacent quilts. Join can also be used to
join surfaces when no trimming effect is desired. For example, you could
join two surfaces that meet in a T, without having to decide which sides
to keep.

Module 10 | Page 8

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Merging Surfaces


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Surface_Operations\Merge
Task 1:

MERGE.PRT

Merge surfaces in a part model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select the oval surface.
3. Press CTRL and select the
boundary surface.
4. In the ribbon, click Merge
from the Editing group.
5. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.
Select Intersect, if necessary.
6. Click Preview Feature

7. Click Resume Feature

8. In the Merge dashboard, click


Change Second Quilt Side
9. Click Preview Feature

10. Click Resume Feature

11. In the graphics window, click


both arrows to flip them.
12. Click Preview Feature

13. Click Resume Feature

14. In the dashboard, click Change


Second Quilt Side

15. Click Complete Feature


de-select all geometry.

2015 PTC

and

Module 10 | Page 9

Task 2:

Join surfaces in a part model.

1. In the model tree, press CTRL


and select JOIN1, JOIN2, and
JOIN3.
2. Right-click and select Unhide
.
3. De-select all geometry.
4. From the In Graphics toolbar,
select No Hidden
from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.
5. Notice the one-sided orange
edges between the main surface
and the three joined surfaces.
6. Press CTRL and select the main
center quilt and right quilt.
7. In the ribbon, click Merge
from the Editing group.
8. In the dashboard, select the
Options tab.
Select Join.

9. Press CTRL and drag a window


around all quilts to select them.
10. Click Complete Feature
de-select all geometry.

and

11. Notice that the edges between


the main surface and three
joined surfaces are two-sided
purple edges.
12. Select Shading
from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.
This completes the procedure.

Module 10 | Page 10

2015 PTC

Creating a Shadow Surface


The Shadow Surface tool drapes a parting surface on top of the
reference part geometry.
A shadow surface creates a parting
surface automatically.
Comparisons between a skirt
surface.
Options:
Clip Plane
Loop Closure
ShutOff Ext/ShutOff Plane/Draft
Angle
Shadow Slides

Figure 1 Viewing Mold Model

Figure 2 Viewing a Shadow Surface

Figure 3 Specifying a
ShutOff Extension

Creating a Shadow Surface


A shadow surface is another type of parting surface you can create
automatically. The Shadow Surface tool drapes a parting surface on top of
the reference part geometry. The following are prerequisites for creating a
shadow surface:
The workpiece must be visible (it cannot be hidden or blanked).
The model must be completely drafted.

Comparison of Shadow Surfaces and Skirt Surfaces


Because both skirt surfaces and shadow surfaces can be used to
automatically create a parting, consider the following comparisons:
The skirt surface requires a silhouette curve while a shadow surface does
not.
The skirt surface may have vertical surfaces because the silhouette curve
determines the upper or lower loop of the non-drafted sections. Since the
shadow surface does not use a silhouette curve, a design model must
be fully drafted.
With the skirt surface, you can exclude segments that fail. The shadow
surface has no option to exclude failed segments.
2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 11

There is no extension control with the shadow surface. You cannot extend
curves, specify tangent conditions, or modify extension directions.

Shadow Surface Options


The following options are available when creating a shadow surface:
Boundary Reference Defines the outer limits of the shadow surface.
Depending on the reference model and workpiece, you may have to specify
the workpiece as the boundary reference.
Direction Specifies the direction that the shadow surface is draped onto
the reference model. By default, the direction is opposite that of the pull
direction.
Clip Plane Specifies the location where the shadow surface stops.
Loop Closure Specifies the loops that the shadow surface closes. By
default, the system closes all inner loops of the reference model, but you
can select specific loops if desired.
ShutOff Ext Enables you to specify the amount of extension toward the
boundary references that the shadow surface will undergo before stopping,
extending in the pull direction, and finally stopping at the boundary
references. When the shadow surface extends outward, it stops either at
the boundary references or a shutoff extension, whichever it encounters
first. If the selected boundary falls outside of the boundary references,
the shadow surface will stop at the boundary references. There are two
methods available for specifying the shutoff extension location:
ShutOff Dist Specifies a uniform offset value around the reference
model perimeter that the shadow surface will extend.
Boundary Enables you to specify your own boundary that the shadow
surface will extend out to. You can use either of the following two
methods to specify the boundary:
Select Enables you to select an existing sketch as the boundary.
Sketch Enables you to sketch the boundary on-the-fly by specifying
the sketch plane, reference plane, and reference direction.
Regardless of which boundary method is used, the boundary must form
a closed loop. It is not necessary for the boundary to be located on a
specific sketching plane or even a sketching plane that is perpendicular
to the pull direction. However, the boundary is ultimately extended in the
pull direction, so if the boundary is created on a plane that is not normal
to the pull direction, you may not get the expected result.
Draft Angle Used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension option, the
draft angle option drafts the Z-direction surfaces of the shutoff extension by
the specified draft angle value. Specifying a draft angle is optional.
ShutOff Plane Used in conjunction with the ShutOff Extension option, the
shutoff plane is the planar reference that the shutoff extension extends
to. The shutoff plane is optional for a shadow surface, but it is a required
reference if a shutoff extension is defined.
Shadow Slides Enables you to specify mold volumes to attach to the
reference model. The resulting shadow surface drapes over the specified
mold volumes. Like the reference model, the mold volume must be fully
drafted to successfully create the shadow surface.
Module 10 | Page 12

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating a Shadow Surface


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Shadow-Surface
Task 1:

SHADOW-SURF.ASM

Create a shadow surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Click Parting Surface
from
the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
3. Click the Surfacing group
drop-down menu and select
Shadow Surface.
4. Select SHADOW-SURF_WRK.
PRT as the Boundary Reference.
5. Click OK from the Shadow
Surface dialog box.
6. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

7. In the model tree, select


SHADOW-SURF.PRT,
press CTRL, and select
SHADOW-SURF_WRK.PRT.
8. Right-click and select Hide

9. Select the shadow surface.


10. Select the shadow surface quilt.
11. Notice that the mold volume
does not influence the resulting
shadow surface.

Task 2:

Specify a shadow slide.

1. In the model tree, right-click


Shadow Surface and select
.
Edit Definition
2. In the Shadow Surface dialog
box, double-click Shadow
Slides.
3. Click Volume Sel from the menu
manager and select the mold
volume.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 13

4. Click Done/Return from the


menu manager.
5. Click OK from the Shadow
Surface dialog box.
6. In the model tree, right-click
Extrude 1 and select Hide

7. Notice that the shadow surface


was also draped over the top of
the mold volume.
8. Right-click Shadow Surface and select Edit Definition

9. Double-click Shadow Slides.


10. Click Volume Sel > Remove All > Confirm > Done/Return from
the menu manager.
11. Click OK.
Task 3:

Specify a shutoff extension.

1. Right-click Shadow Surface and select Edit Definition

2. In the Shadow Surface dialog box, double-click ShutOff Ext.


3. Click ShutOff Dist from the menu manager, type 1 as the silhouette
edges offset, and press ENTER.
4. In the Shadow Surface dialog
box, double-click ShutOff Plane.
5. Select datum plane SHUTOFF
from the model tree.
6. Click Done/Return.
7. Click Preview.
8. Click Repaint
from the In
Graphics toolbar.
9. In the Shadow Surface dialog
box, double-click ShutOff Ext.
10. Click Boundary > Select > One
By One from the menu manager.
11. Query-select the entire
SHUTOFF_BOUNDARY sketch
and click Done from the menu
manager.

Module 10 | Page 14

2015 PTC

12. In the Shadow Surface dialog


box, double-click Draft Angle.
Type 4 as the value and press
ENTER.
Click OK.

Task 4:

Specify a clip plane.

1. Right-click Shadow Surface and


select Edit Definition

2. In the Shadow Surface dialog


box, double-click Clip Plane.
3. Select datum plane
CLIP_PLANE in the model
tree.
4. Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.
5. Click OK.
6. In the model tree, right-click
SHADOW-SURF.PRT and
.
select Unhide
7. Spin the model and observe
the shadow surface from the
underside.

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 15

Creating a Parting Surface Manually


You can create the parting surface manually in circumstances
where the skirt surface does not provide the desired shape.
You can use a combination of
manual parting surface and skirt
surface techniques.
To manually create a parting
surface:
Start the Parting Surface tool.
Create all surface features for
a given loop.
Merge the surfaces together.
Complete the parting surface.

Figure 1 Mold Model Before


Manual Parting Surfaces Created

Figure 2 Manual Parting Surface


Created

Figure 3 Skirt Surface Used to


Generate Other Parting Surface

Creating a Parting Surface Manually


Sometimes the silhouette curve and skirt surface features do not provide
you the desired parting surface shape. You can create the parting surface
manually in these types of circumstances. You may also use a combination
of a skirt surface and manual parting surface for a mold model. The skirt
surface can be used for the parting surface in the locations where the proper
geometry has been created, and a manual parting surface can be created in
areas where the skirt surface does not provide the desired shape.
To create a parting surface manually, you can click Parting Surface
from
the Parting Surface & Mold Volume group and then use the various basic
and advanced surface creation techniques. Each of the surfaces created
belongs to the parting surface feature. You can also use the various editing
and manipulation tools on the surfaces.
After all surfaces have been created for a given loop area in the mold model,
you must use Merge
to merge the surfaces together before completing
the parting surface feature.
In Figure 2, a total of three surfaces were created to close the loop and create
the parting surface. Two surfaces are fill surfaces, and the third surface is an
extruded surface. Once all three surfaces were created they were merged
together. At this point the silhouette curve could be used to create the outer
loop of the parting surface and to fill the hole shutoff in the boss.
Module 10 | Page 16

2015 PTC

Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces


A saddle shutoff typically requires you to create multiple
surfaces to achieve the desired shape.
Create the surfaces.
Perform surface manipulations.
Merge the surfaces to create the
final shutoff.

Figure 1 Saddle Surface Created

Figure 2 Face Surfaces Created

Figure 3 Final Saddle Shutoff

Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces


To handle a saddle shutoff within the part, you must create the surfaces which
represent the shutoff faces. A saddle shutoff is a bit more challenging than
the parting line surface or a face shutoff because you generally need several
surfaces to form the required shape. Typically, you create the saddle surface
and then create the face surfaces.
You can extrude or revolve the surfaces, or use more advanced geometry
creation methods like blended surfaces, depending on the desired geometry.
You can even copy existing surfaces and paste them. You can then
manipulate these surfaces by extending, trimming, and offsetting them if
needed.
Once the saddle surface and face surfaces have been created, you must
merge the surfaces together to form the required shape.
To create surfaces for saddle shutoffs, it is beneficial to use existing
geometry edges and surfaces as references for your surfaces.
However, remember that if you use existing geometry, your surfaces
become dependent on that geometry.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 17

PROCEDURE - Creating Saddle Shutoff Surfaces


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Surface_Saddle-ShutOff
Task 1:

SADDLE-SHUTOFF.ASM

Complete the saddle shutoff surface in the mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:

2. Select SADDLE-SHUTOFF_
WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Click Parting Surface
from
the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
7. Click Properties
from the
Controls group.
Edit the Name to
SADDLE_SHUTOFF and
press ENTER.
8. Click Extrude
Shapes group.

from the

9. Right-click and select Define


Internal Sketch.
10. Select datum plane
MOLD_RIGHT as the Sketch
Plane.
11. In the Sketch dialog box, select
Top as the Orientation and click
Sketch.
12. Click Sketch View
In Graphics toolbar.

from the

13. Select Hidden Line


from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.

Module 10 | Page 18

2015 PTC

14. Enable only the following


Sketcher Display types:

15. Click Project


from the
Sketching group, select the
seven edges, and click Close
from the Type dialog box.
16. Select Shading
from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.
17. Click OK

18. Orient to the Standard


Orientation.
19. In the dashboard, edit the depth
to Symmetric
.
Edit the depth to 100 and click
Complete Feature

20. Select datum plane


MOLD_FRONT as the Sketch
Plane.
21. Click Extrude

22. Click Sketch View

23. Click Hidden Line

24. Click References


from the
Setup group and select the right,
angled silhouette surface.
25. Click Close from the References
dialog box.

26. Click Line Chain


and sketch
the line on the angled reference,
starting at the horizontal
reference and stopping above
the saddle surface.
27. Click Shading
28. Click OK
2015 PTC

.
Module 10 | Page 19

29. Orient to the Standard


Orientation.
30. In the dashboard, edit the depth
to Symmetric
.
Edit the depth to 100 and click
Complete Feature

31. Select the quilt you just extruded.


32. Click the Editing group
drop-down menu and select
Mirror

33. Select datum plane


MOLD_RIGHT and click
Complete Feature
dashboard.

from the

34. Disable Plane Display

35. Edit the selection filter to Quilts.


36. Select the saddle quilt, press
CTRL, and select the right face
quilt.
37. Click Merge
group.

from the Editing

38. In the dashboard, click Change


First Quilt Side

and Change

Second Quilt Side


as
necessary until you get the
correct final geometry.
Click Complete Feature

Module 10 | Page 20

2015 PTC

39. Select the saddle quilt, press


CTRL, and select the left face
quilt.
40. Click Merge

41. In the dashboard, click Change


First Quilt Side

and Change

Second Quilt Side


as
necessary until you get the
correct final geometry.
Click Complete Feature
42. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

43. Spin the model and inspect the


saddle surface

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 21

Creating Fill Surfaces


During parting surface creation, you can fill a sketch to create
a planar surface.
Sketch rules:
Must use a sketched curve.
Can be internal or external.
Must be closed.
Can be any shape.
Can reference other geometry.

Figure 1 Creating a Fill Surface

Figure 2 Creating a Second


Filled Surface

Figure 3 Final Parting


Surface Created

Creating Fill Surfaces


During parting surface creation, you can fill a sketch to create a planar
surface. You can either select the sketch first and then start the Fill tool, or
start the Fill tool and then select the sketch. If you select the sketch first and
then start the Fill tool, the feature is automatically completed.
The following are important points about the sketches used by the Fill tool:
The sketch must be a sketched curve, and it can be either an internal or
external sketch.
The sketch must be closed. However, it can contain multiple loops.
The sketch can be any shape. That is, it can contain either tangent or
non-tangent entities.
The sketch may reference other geometry.
Because you are using the Fill tool to fill gaps in the reference model during
parting surface creation, you will often be referencing other geometry,
whether edges or surfaces of the reference model or workpiece, or edges
of other parting surfaces. Usually the resulting planar surface is part of a
larger parting surface, and thus the filled surface must be merged with the
other portions of the parting surface.
Module 10 | Page 22

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Fill Surfaces


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Parting-Surface_Fill
Task 1:

FILL-SURFACE.ASM

Create a filled surface for a parting surface.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Notice that there is no parting
surface created for the square
hole to the left.
3. In the model tree, right-click
Skirt Surface id 518 and select
Hide
.

4. Click Parting Surface


from
the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
5. Click Fill
group.

from the Surfacing

6. Right-click and select Define


Internal Sketch.
7. Zoom in and select the surface
shown as the Sketch Plane.
8. Select datum plane
MOLD_FRONT as the Reference
and click Sketch.
9. Click References
from the
Setup group and select the five
surfaces as references.
10. Click Close from the References
dialog box.
11. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 23

12. Click Line Chain


the eight lines.
13. Click OK

and sketch

14. Click Complete Feature

Task 2:

Create a second filled surface for a parting surface.

1. Press ALT and select the surface


shown as the Sketch Plane.
.

2. Click Fill

3. Click Project
from the
Sketching group.
4. Select the three edges of the
other filled surface, the two
straight edges of the hole, and
the two curved edges of the hole.
5. Click OK
Feature

and click Complete


.

6. Click in the background to


de-select all geometry.

Module 10 | Page 24

2015 PTC

Task 3:

Create an extrude feature and merge the three surfaces together.

1. Click Extrude
Shapes group.

from the

2. Select the second created fill


surface.
3. Click Project
and select
the three edges of the second
created fill surface.
Click Close.
4. Click OK

5. Edit the depth to To Selected


and select the first filled surface.
6. Click Complete Feature

7. Edit the selection filter to Quilts.


8. Select the top flat quilt, press
CTRL, and select the extruded
quilt.
9. Click Merge
group.

from the Editing

10. Press CTRL and select the


smaller filled surface.
11. Click Complete Feature
12. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 25

Extending Curves
You can select curves or edge chains on the reference model to
extend and create a parting surface.
Extension Directions:
Normal to the Pull Direction
Perpendicular to reference
model
Perpendicular to boundary
Parallel to the Pull Direction
Tangent to the Model
User Defined Direction
Shut Off types:
Boundary
Distance
To a Reference

Figure 2 Extending Curves


Tangent to the Model

Figure 1 Extending Curves


Normal to Pull Direction

Figure 3 Adding a Distance


Shut Off

Extending Curves
You can select curves or edge chains on the reference model to extend and
create a parting surface. You must specify the reference model so that the
system can identify which curves are available for selection. You must also
specify the boundary reference (usually the workpiece) to instruct the system
on how far to extend the specified curves.
The following extension directions are available for the selected curves:
Normal to the Pull Direction All specified curves are extended normal to
the pull direction. There are two additional options you can select from
when curves extend normal to the pull direction:
Perpendicular to reference model The specified curves extend normal
to the pull direction and perpendicular to the adjacent reference model
surfaces.
Perpendicular to boundary The specified curves extend normal to the
pull direction and perpendicular to the surfaces of the defined boundary
reference model (usually the workpiece).
Parallel to the Pull Direction All specified curves are extended parallel
to the pull direction.
Module 10 | Page 26

2015 PTC

Tangent to the Model All specified curves are extended tangent to the
adjacent reference model surfaces.
Under Defined Direction All specified curves extend normal to the
direction reference you specify.
Optionally, you can enable the system to create surface transitions across
gaps in the extended edges.
You can also define multiple extensions for a given operation. You can define
one set of edges to be extended in a specific direction and define a different
set of edges to be extended in a different direction.

Shut Off Types


When extending edges, you can choose to add a shut off if desired within the
Shut Off tab of the dashboard. The following shut off types are available:
Boundary The default type, the Boundary type extends the edges in the
specified direction, out to the defined boundary reference model.
Distance Enables you to specify a distance outward that the curves
extend from the reference model before they stop and extend in the pull
direction. With the Distance shut off type, you can also specify a Shut Off
Plane. Rather than extending the curves in the pull direction out to the
workpiece boundary, the curves instead stop at the defined shut off plane
reference. Additionally, you can draft the surfaces extended in the pull
direction by specifying a draft angle.
To a Reference Enables you to specify a sketch that the curves extend
from the reference model before they stop and extend in the pull direction.
With the To a Reference type, you can also specify a Shut Off Plane.
Rather than extending the curves in the pull direction out to the workpiece
boundary, the curves instead stop at the defined shut off plane reference.
Additionally, you can draft the surfaces extended in the pull direction by
specifying a draft angle.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 27

PROCEDURE - Extending Curves


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Parting-Surface_Extend-Curve
Task 1:

EXTEND-CURVE.ASM

Extend selected reference model curves.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. From the model tree, select
EXTEND-CURVE_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Click Parting Surface
from
the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
7. Click Extend Curve
Surfacing group.

from the

8. Press CTRL and select the five


outer bottom edges.
9. In the dashboard, select the References tab.
10. Notice that the reference model is automatically defined, as is the
boundary reference.

11. In the dashboard, notice that the Direction is Normal to the Pull
Direction.
The five selected curves extend normal to the pull direction until
they intersect the boundary.

Module 10 | Page 28

2015 PTC

12. Select Parallel to the Pull


Direction from the Direction
drop-down list.
The five selected curves
extend parallel to the pull
direction until they intersect
the boundary.
13. Select Tangent to the Model
from the Direction drop-down list.
The five selected curves
extend tangent to the model
until they intersect the
boundary.
14. Select Normal to Pull Direction.
15. Press CTRL and select the top
outer edge of the notch.
16. Press CTRL and select the left
and right outer notch edges.
17. Notice that the edges extend in
the wrong directions.

18. In the dashboard, select the


Extensions tab.
Select Perpendicular to
boundary as the Extension.
19. Notice that all selected
references extend out to
the workpiece boundary,
perpendicular to the workpiece
surfaces.
20. In the dashboard, select the
Create Transitions check box.
21. Notice that the gaps between
the extended edges are
automatically filled with transition
surfaces.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 29

22. Select Perpendicular to reference model as the Extension.


23. In the Extensions tab, scroll the Chain collector to the bottom.
24. Select the last reference, right-click, and select Remove.
25. Select the last reference, right-click, and select Remove.
Task 2:

Add a new extend direction.

1. In the Extensions tab, click *New


Extension.
2. Press CTRL and select the two
vertical outer edges of the notch.

3. Select User Defined Direction


from the Direction drop-down list.
4. Select the right, vertical
workpiece surface.

5. Click Complete Feature


6. Click OK
group.

Task 3:

from the Controls

Experiment with the various extension shutoff options.

1. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Unhide


2. Right-click Extend Curve 1 and select Edit Definition

.
.

3. In the dashboard, select the Shut Off tab.


4. Notice that the currently defined shut off Type is Boundary.

Module 10 | Page 30

2015 PTC

5. Select Distance from the Type


drop-down list.
6. Edit the Distance value to 10.
7. Select datum plane SHUTOFF
as the Shut Off Plane reference.
8. Edit the Draft Angle value to 3.

9. Edit the Draft Angle value back


to 0.
10. Select To a Reference from the
Type drop-down list.
11. Query-select the entire Sketch
1 sketch.

12. Right-click and select Shut Off


Plane to activate the collector.
13. Select the bottom workpiece
surface.
14. Click Complete Feature

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 31

Filling Loops
You can use the Fill Loops tool to manually specify the reference
chain that forms the loop to be filled.
Loop types include:
Surface.
Fit a mid-plane.
Fit a mid-plane automatically.
Fit a mid-surface.
Extend to plane.
Extend to surface.
Specify an offset value for the
mid-plane types.
Figure 1 Surface Loop Type

Figure 2 Fit a Mid-Plane Loop Type

Figure 3 Fit a Mid-Plane


Automatically Loop Type

Filling Loops
You must fill any closed loops in the reference model with a surface that acts
as the parting surface for the given loop. You can use the Fill Loops
to manually specify the reference chain that forms the loop to be filled.

tool

The following types of fill loop surfaces can be created:


Surface The system fills in the specified loop with a surface. Depending
on the surrounding contours, the resulting surface may not suffice for a
parting surface.
Fit a mid-plane The system creates a planar surface at the midpoint of
the selected loop references. The surface is created parallel to the surface
or datum plane you specify. The shape of this surface is based on the loop
shape. You can also specify an offset from the references.
Fit a mid-plane automatically The system creates a planar surface at the
midpoint of the selected loop references, normal to the pull direction. You
can specify an offset from the references.
Fit a mid-surface The system creates a planar surface at the midpoint of
the selected loop references. The surface is created through the selected
surface. The selected surface does not need to be planar. You can specify
an offset from the references.
Module 10 | Page 32

2015 PTC

Extend to plane The system extends the selected loop reference edges
up to the selected planar surface and caps the end.
Extend to surface The system extends the selected loop reference edges
up to the selected surface and caps the end. The capped end shape takes
on that of the selected surface, which does not need to be planar.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 33

PROCEDURE - Filling Loops


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Parting-Surface_Fill-Loops
Task 1:

LOOPS.ASM

Experiment with the different options available for filling loops.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:

2. From the model tree, select


LOOPS_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Click Parting Surface
from
the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
7. Click Fill Loops
Surfacing group.

from the

8. Zoom in to the top of the model.


9. Select the edge shown.
10. Press SHIFT and select the other
three tangent edges.
11. In the dashboard, notice that the
Type is Surface.
12. Notice the resulting preview
surface.

13. In the dashboard, edit the Type


to Fit a mid-plane.
14. Select datum plane EXTEND.

Module 10 | Page 34

2015 PTC

15. In the dashboard, select the


Closures tab.
Edit the Offset to 8.

16. Select Fit a mid-plane


automatically from the Type
drop-down list.
17. Notice that the resulting plane is
normal to the pull direction.

18. Select Fit a mid-surface from


the Type drop-down list..
19. Select the top surface of the
reference model.

20. Select Extend to plane from the


Type drop-down list.

21. Select the bottom surface of


the reference model as the new
plane reference.

22. Select Extend to surface from


the Type drop-down list.
23. Click Complete Feature
from the dashboard.
24. Click OK
group.

from the Controls

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 35

Creating Shut Offs


You can use the Shut Off tool to fill both open and closed holes
in the reference model.
To create a shut off:
Specify the reference
surfaces.
Select the shut off loops.
Close all internal loops.
Optionally exclude loops.
Cap open loops.
The surface must pass
through the ends of the
open loop.

Figure 2 Closing All


Internal Loops

Figure 1 Creating a Shut Off

Figure 3 Capping an Open Loop

Creating Shut Offs


You must fill any loops in the reference model with a surface that acts as the
parting surface for the given loop. You can use the Shut Off
open and closed holes in the reference model.

to fill both

To create the shut off, you must specify the following:


Reference Surfaces Specifies the surfaces that define the perimeter of
the loops you wish to close.
Shut Off Loops Enables you to select the edges of the specified reference
surfaces that define the desired loop.

Closing All Internal Loops


You can select the Close all internal loops check box to automatically fill all
closed holes within the selected reference surfaces. When this option is
selected, it is not necessary to select the shut off loop edges.
If desired, you can also exclude individual holes from the shut off operation.

Capping Open Loops


The Shut Off tool enables you to also fill open loops in the reference model
by specifying a cap surface. The cap surface closes the open loop so that
it can be filled with the parting surface. The specified cap surface(s) must
Module 10 | Page 36

2015 PTC

pass through the ends of the open loop. If a surface is not available, you can
create a datum plane to define the cap surface.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 37

PROCEDURE - Creating Shut Offs


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Parting-Surface_Shut-Off
Task 1:

SHUT-OFF.ASM

Create shut offs by closing all internal loops.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Click Parting Surface
from
the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
3. Click Shut Off
Surfacing group.

from the

4. In the dashboard, select the


Close all internal loops check
box.
5. Select the surface shown.
6. Notice that all three internal loops
within the surface are closed.
7. Press CTRL and select the
rounded surface.
8. Again, notice that all internal
loops within the surface are
closed.

9. In the dashboard, select the


References tab.
Click in the Exclude Loops
collector to activate it.
Select an edge on the leftmost
hole, press SHIFT, and select
the three adjacent edges.

Module 10 | Page 38

2015 PTC

10. Click Complete Feature

11. Click in the background to


de-select all geometry.
12. Notice that the one hole has
been excluded.

13. Click Shut Off

14. Select the Close all internal


loops check box.
15. Zoom in on the top, leftmost hole.
16. Press CTRL and select the two
surfaces.
17. Press CTRL and select the two
surfaces on each of the four
other similar holes.
18. Click Complete Feature
and click in the background to
de-select all geometry.

19. Orient to the 3D2 view


orientation.
20. Click Shut Off

21. Select the Close all internal


loops check box.
22. Press CTRL and select the two
surfaces.
23. Click Complete Feature
24. Click OK
group.

2015 PTC

from the Controls

Module 10 | Page 39

Task 2:

Create shut offs by specifying loops.

1. Orient to the 3D3 view


orientation.
2. Click Parting Surface
click Shut Off

and

3. Press CTRL and select the five


surfaces.

4. Right-click and select Shut Off


Loops.
5. Select an edge, press SHIFT,
and select the nine adjacent
edges to create the loop.

6. Right-click and select Reference


Surfaces.
7. Press CTRL and select the same
five surfaces on the second tab
location, spinning the model as
necessary.

8. Right-click and select Shut Off


Loops.
9. Press CTRL and select an edge.
10. Press SHIFT and select the nine
adjacent edges to create the
second loop.

Module 10 | Page 40

2015 PTC

11. Repeat the process to create the


shut off for the third tab.
and

12. Click Complete Feature


click OK

Task 3:

Create a shut off by capping the open loops.

1. Orient to the 3D4 view


orientation.
2. Click Parting Surface
click Shut Off

and

3. Select the surface shown as the


reference surface.

4. Right-click and select Shut Off


Loops.
5. Select an edge, press SHIFT,
and select the six adjacent
edges.

6. Right-click and select Cap


Surfaces.
7. In the dashboard, click Datum
and select Plane
.
8. Select the surface as the Offset
reference.
9. Click OK from the Datum Plane
dialog box.

2015 PTC

Module 10 | Page 41

10. In the dashboard, click Resume


.
Feature
11. Notice that the parting surface
is shut off at the newly created
datum plane.

12. Right-click and select Shut Off


Loops.
13. Press CTRL and select an edge
on the other loop.
14. Press SHIFT and select the
same five adjacent edges to
complete the second loop.
15. Click Complete Feature
click OK

and

This completes the procedure.

Module 10 | Page 42

2015 PTC

Module

11

Splitting Mold Volumes


Module Overview
After the necessary mold volumes and parting surfaces have been created,
you must split the workpiece and mold volumes at the parting surface into
the final core, cavity, and slider volumes, as well as any other volumes that
are to become mold components in the final mold.
In this module, you learn how to split the workpiece and mold volumes, as
well as how to blank and unblank mold items in the mold model.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Split the workpiece.
Split mold volumes.
Split volumes using multiple parting surfaces.
Blank and unblank mold items.
Use split classification to generate resulting mold volumes.

2015 PTC

Module 11 | Page 1

Splitting the Workpiece


You can split the workpiece by using a parting surface or mold
volume to create the core and cavity volumes of the mold model.
Split the workpiece using the All
Wrkpcs split option.
A new mold volume is created
equal to the workpiece volume.
Reference model geometry
subtracted.
The volume is split into one or two
volumes.
Use a parting surface or other
volume.
Figure 1 Mold Model and
Parting Surface

Figure 2 Split Mold Model


Core Volume

Figure 3 Split Mold Model


Cavity Volume

Splitting the Workpiece


You can split or divide the workpiece with the All Wrkpcs split option by using
a parting surface or a mold volume. When the workpiece split is performed,
Creo Parametric calculates the total volume of the workpiece and creates
a mold volume from it. The system then subtracts, or trims, the reference
model geometry and any mold features such as gates, runners, and sprues
from the workpiece volume and creates a Refpart Cutout feature in the model
tree (this Refpart Cutout feature displays in the model tree differently than a
reference part cutout operation that is performed on a mold volume).
The remaining mold volume is then split at the specified parting surface or
mold volume. The system trims the amount of workpiece volume to one side
of the parting surface or mold volume and turns that volume into its own
mold volume. If applicable, the system also trims the amount of workpiece
volume on the other side of the parting surface or mold volume and turns
that volume into its own mold volume. A simple mold model containing only
a core and cavity is a typical example. One of the mold volumes becomes
the core, and the other the cavity.

Module 11 | Page 2

2015 PTC

One Volume or Two?


For each split operation you must determine how many resultant mold
volumes are to be created by specifying one of the following options :
Two Volumes Splits the workpiece into two mold volumes.
One Volume Splits the workpiece into a single mold volume, discarding
the other portion. You must specify which portion you want included in
the mold volume. You can do this using the Island List. The Island List
enables you to select which portion to include in the new volume. When
you cursor over an island in the list, the corresponding geometry highlights
blue in the graphics window.
Regardless of how many volumes are created, the system prompts you to
name each one. You can determine the volume to be created by shading
it. The system hides all the other volumes at this time, and creates a mold
volume with the name you specify.

Workpiece Splitting Guidelines


Consider the following guidelines when splitting the workpiece:
A split operation in a mold model using the All Wrkpcs option is typically
only performed one time.
Splitting a workpiece does not modify its geometry. Whenever a workpiece
is split, the system copies the volume occupied by the workpiece and
creates a mold volume from it.
If you split a workpiece by a parting surface, the system modifies the
existing volume. That is, a volume is split and either one or two volumes
are created in place of the original volume.
Splitting the workpiece with parting surfaces ensures that these solid mold
components add up to the desired volume, with no extra or missing pieces.
If you split the workpiece by a parting surface, the parting surface must
completely intersect the workpiece.
If you split a workpiece by another volume, the original volumes are not
modified. Rather, the original volumes are copied and then split. For
example, if you use the Mold Volume, Two Volumes option and split mold
volume A using mold volume B, there will be a total of four mold volumes
after the split: original volumes A and B, and new volumes C and D. One of
the new mold volumes C or D will be identical to the splitting mold volume B.
As a result, you should use the One Volume option when splitting by a mold
volume. This way, when you split mold volume A with mold volume B, you
end up with a total of three mold volumes: original volumes A and B, and
new volume C. New volume C is equivalent to volume A minus volume B.
Using the One Volume option avoids redundant volumes and keeps the
number of mold volume features down in the model tree.
Name all resultant mold volumes appropriately, as this will help you
determine which mold volumes to create solid mold components from later
on. For example, if the mold volume will become the core mold component,
name it core_vol.

2015 PTC

Module 11 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Splitting the Workpiece


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Split-Workpiece
Task 1:

SPLIT-WORKPIECE.ASM

Split the mold model workpiece into volumes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select the SPLIT-WORKPIECE_
WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the skirt parting surface.
7. Select Volume Split
from the
Mold Volume types drop-down
list in the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
8. Click Two Volumes > All
Wrkpcs > Done from the menu
manager.
9. Notice that the workpiece has
been filled with a mold volume.

10. Select the parting surface from


the graphics window.
11. Click OK from the Select dialog
box.

Module 11 | Page 4

2015 PTC

12. Click OK from the Split dialog


box.
13. In the Properties dialog box, click
Shade.
Notice that the volume will be
the core of the mold.
Type CORE_VOL and press
ENTER.

14. In the Properties dialog box, click


Shade.
15. Orient to the 3D view orientation
and notice that this volume will
be the cavity of the mold.
16. In the Properties dialog box,
type CAVITY_VOL and press
ENTER.

17. Orient to the Standard


Orientation.
18. In the model tree, notice the
Refpart Cutout feature.
19. Also notice the two mold
volumes that were created, and
their names.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 11 | Page 5

Splitting Mold Volumes


You can also split existing mold volumes to create volumes for
sliders, lifters, inserts, and so on.
Split mold volumes using the Mold
Volume split option.
Specify the volume to be split in
the Search Tool.
The specified volume is split into
one or two volumes.
Use a parting surface or other
volume.

Figure 2 Core Volume Before it


is Split for Slider Volumes

Figure 1 Mold Model and


Slider Volumes

Figure 3 Core Volume After


Splits for Slider Volumes

Splitting Mold Volumes


You can split an existing mold volume in a mold model using the Mold
Volume split option. This option is only available if the workpiece has already
been split, or if you have sketched a mold volume slider, insert, or lifter, for
example. Unlike the All Wrkpces option, when a mold volume is split, the
system does not create a reference part cutout in the model tree.
When you specify the Mold Volume option, the system uses the Search Tool
to perform a search for all quilts (mold volumes) in the mold model. You
must specify the desired quilt (mold volume) to be split from the list of results
found. You should not modify the parameters of the Search Tool to obtain
different results.
A mold model containing sliders, inserts, or lifters needs to undergo multiple
split operations because multiple mold components will be created from the
mold model.

One Volume or Two?


For each split operation you must determine how many resultant mold
volumes are to be created by specifying one of the following options:
Two Volumes Splits the mold volume into two mold volumes.
Module 11 | Page 6

2015 PTC

One Volume Splits the mold volume into a single mold volume,
discarding the other portion. You must specify which portion you want
included in the mold volume. This is done using the Island List. The Island
List enables you to select which portion is to be included in the new volume.
When you hover over an island in the list, the corresponding geometry
highlights blue in the graphics window.
Regardless of how many volumes are created, the system prompts you to
name each one. You can determine the volume to be created by shading
it. The system hides all the other volumes at this time, and creates a mold
volume with the name you specify.

Creating Intermediate Mold Volumes


Depending on the mold model and its complexity, not every mold volume
created will be used to create a final solid mold component. It may be
necessary to create intermediate, or temporary mold volumes during
splitting operations. For example, if you split the workpiece into the core and
cavity volumes, but the core volume must further be split to remove a slider
volume, you create an intermediate core volume.

Mold Volume Splitting Guidelines


Consider the following guidelines when splitting mold volumes:
When you split a volume by a parting surface, the volume is split at the
parting surface and either one or two volumes are created in place of the
original volume.
When you split a volume by another volume, the original volumes are not
modified. Rather, the original volumes are copied and then split. For
example, if you use the Mold Volume, Two Volumes option and split mold
volume A using mold volume B, there will be a total of four mold volumes
after the split: original volumes A and B, and new volumes C and D. One of
the new mold volumes C or D will be identical to the splitting mold volume B.
As a result, you should use the One Volume option when splitting by a mold
volume. This way, when you split mold volume A with mold volume B, you
end up with a total of three mold volumes: original volumes A and B, and
new volume C. New volume C is equivalent to volume A minus volume B.
Using the One Volume option avoids redundant volumes and keeps the
number of mold volume features down in the model tree.
When you split the mold volume by a parting surface, the parting surface
must completely intersect the mold volume.
Name all resultant mold volumes appropriately, as this will help you
determine which mold volumes to create solid mold components from later
on. For example, if a mold volume is used as an intermediate mold volume,
name it temp_mold_vol1, or something similar so you know later on that it
will not be used to create a solid mold component.

2015 PTC

Module 11 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Splitting Mold Volumes


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Split-Volumes
Task 1:

SPLIT-VOLUMES.ASM

Split the workpiece and mold volumes of a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select the SPLIT-VOLUMES_
WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the skirt parting surface
and the two slider mold volumes
in the graphics window and
model tree.
7. Select Volume Split
from the
Mold Volume types drop-down
list in the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
8. Click Two Volumes > All
Wrkpcs > Done from the menu
manager.
9. Notice that the workpiece has
been filled with a mold volume.
10. Select the parting surface from
the graphics window and click
OK from the Select dialog box.

Module 11 | Page 8

2015 PTC

11. Click OK from the Split dialog


box.
12. In the Properties dialog box, click
Shade.
13. Click Wireframe
Graphics toolbar.

from the In

14. Notice that the volume will be the


core of the mold, but that it has
not taken the slider volumes into
account.
15. In the Properties dialog box type
TEMP-CORE_VOL1 and press
ENTER.
16. In the Properties dialog box, click
Shade.
17. Spin the model and notice that
this volume will be the cavity of
the mold.
18. In the Properties dialog box,
type CAVITY_VOL and press
ENTER.
19. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.
20. In the model tree, right-click SPLIT ID 7286 [CAVITY_VOL-MOLD
VOLUME] and select Hide

21. Click Volume Split


and click One Volume > Mold Volume >
Done from the menu manager.
22. In the Search Tool, select the
TEMP-CORE_VOL1 quilt and
.
click Add Item
Click Close.
23. Query-select the front slider
volume and click OK from the
Select dialog box.

2015 PTC

Module 11 | Page 9

24. In the menu manager, select the


Island 1 check box and click
Done Sel.
25. Click OK from the Split dialog
box.

26. In the Properties dialog box,


click Shade and notice the slider
volume has been trimmed from
the temporary core volume.
Type TEMP-CORE_VOL2 and
press ENTER.

27. Click Volume Split


and click
One Volume > Mold Volume >
Done.
28. In the Search Tool, select the
TEMP-CORE_VOL2 quilt and
.
click Add Item
Click Close.
29. Query-select the rear slider
volume and click OK from the
Select dialog box.
30. In the menu manager, select the
Island 1 check box and click
Done Sel.
31. Click OK from the Split dialog
box.

32. In the Properties dialog box, click


Shade and notice that the slider
volume has been trimmed from
the final core volume.
Type CORE_VOL and press
ENTER.

This completes the procedure.

Module 11 | Page 10

2015 PTC

Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting Surfaces


You can use multiple parting surfaces to split a workpiece or
mold volume.
You can use multiple parting
surfaces in a single split operation.
You can use multiple parting
surfaces in multiple split
operations.
Figure 1 Model Tree Containing
Two Parting Surfaces

Figure 2 Selecting Multiple


Parting Surfaces

Figure 3 Viewing Multiple


Parting Surfaces

Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting Surfaces


You can use multiple parting surfaces to split volumes in two different ways:
You can use multiple parting surfaces to split a workpiece or mold volume
into multiple mold volumes. You can use one parting surface for one
split operation, and specify a different parting surface for a second split
operation. Of course you must also specify the workpiece or mold volume
to split and the names of the first and, if applicable, second volumes.
Sometimes the shape of the reference model and the parting surfaces
created require that you specify more than one parting surface during a
single split operation. In these circumstances, you can press CTRL in
order to select multiple parting surfaces. You can also select multiple mold
volumes to split a workpiece or mold volume in a split operation.

2015 PTC

Module 11 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Splitting Volumes using Multiple Parting


Surfaces
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Split-Volumes_Multiple
Task 1:

MULT-SURF1.ASM

Split a volume using multiple parting surfaces in one split.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select the MULT-SURF1_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice that there are two parting surfaces, SKIRT_PART-SURF and
MANUAL_PART-SURF.
7. Select Volume Split
from the
Mold Volume types drop-down
list in the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
8. Click Two Volumes > All
Wrkpcs > Done from the menu
manager.
9. Press CTRL, select the two
parting surfaces, and click OK
from the Select dialog box.
10. Click OK from the Split dialog
box.
11. In the Properties dialog box, click
Shade, type CORE_VOL, and
press ENTER.

12. In the Properties dialog box, click


Shade, type CAVITY_VOL, and
press ENTER.

Module 11 | Page 12

2015 PTC

Task 2:

Split volumes with multiple parting surfaces in two split operations.

1. Click Open

and double-click MULT-SURF2.ASM.

2. Select the MULT-SURF2_WRK.PRT.


3. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style > Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the two parting surfaces MAIN_PART_SURF and
SIDE_PART_SURF.
7. Click Volume Split

8. Click Two Volumes > All


Wrkpcs > Done from the menu
manager.
9. Select the SIDE_PART_SURF
and click OK from the Select
dialog box.
10. Click OK from the Split dialog
box.
11. In the Properties dialog box, click
Shade, type TEMP-MOLD_VOL,
and press ENTER.

12. In the Properties dialog box, click


Shade, type SLIDER_VOL, and
press ENTER.

13. Click Volume Split


and click
Two Volumes > Mold Volume
> Done.
14. In the Search Tool dialog box,
select TEMP-MOLD_VOL, click
Add Item
, and click Close.
15. Query-select the
MAIN_PART_SURF and click
OK from the Select dialog box.

2015 PTC

Module 11 | Page 13

16. Click OK from the Split dialog


box.
17. In the Properties dialog box, click
Shade, type CORE_VOL, and
press ENTER.
18. In the Properties dialog box, click
Shade, type CAVITY_VOL, and
press ENTER.

This completes the procedure.

Module 11 | Page 14

2015 PTC

Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items


The Blank and Unblank options enable you to add or remove
mold items to the current mold model display.
Use these options at
any time while in Mold
mode.
You can blank and
unblank the following:
Parting surface
Volume
Component
Use the following
methods:
Blank and Unblank
Dialog Box
Right-click after item
selection.
Figure 1 Blank and Unblank Dialog Boxes

Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items


You can blank and unblank mold items at any time during your work in
Mold mode. Blank and unblank functionality is similar to hide and unhide
functionality. However, unlike the hide-unhide functionality, you do not
have to save the blank-unblank status. It is retained for you automatically.
Additionally, when a mold item is comprised of multiple features, such as a
manually created parting surface, you can blank or unblank the entire parting
surface in one operation, rather than having to hide or unhide individual
features.
The following items can be blanked and unblanked:
Parting surface
Enables you to blank/unblank any parting surface
in the mold model.
Enables you to blank/unblank any mold volume, such as
Volume
sliders, cores, and cavities.
Component
Enables you to blank/unblank the reference model,
workpiece, or any other mold component.
You can blank and unblank mold items using the following methods:
Click Mold Display
, in the View tab, to access the Blank and Unblank
dialog box. You can also press CTRL+B to access the dialog box. The
Filter Tree in the dialog box enables you to see only the mold item types
you want to blank or unblank. You can filter by parting surfaces, volumes,
or components. If you click Parting surface
, for example, you will see
only the parting surfaces available for selection in the dialog box. When
2015 PTC

Module 11 | Page 15

a Component filter option is activated, a series of check boxes becomes


available, enabling you to further filter the components displayed in the
Blank-Unblank dialog box. The following component items can further be
filtered:
Workpiece
Ref Model
Mold Component
Mold Base Comp
Gen Assembly
Molding
The Blank and Unblank dialog box contains a Blank and Unblank tab.
Items listed in the Blank tab are those that are visible in the graphics
window but available for blanking. If you select an item and click Blank, the
item is moved to the Unblank tab of the dialog box. Similarly, the Unblank
tab displays all items that are blanked in the graphics window.
Select items from the model tree, then right-click and select Blank or
Unblank. If the mold item is comprised of numerous features, which can
occur for a mold volume or manually created parting surfaces, you must
select the first feature to blank or unblank the item. The Blank and Unblank
menu selection is only available for the first feature of the mold item.
Select items from the graphics window, then right-click and select Blank
or Unblank.

Blanking and Unblanking Requirements


Consider the following blanking and unblanking criteria for items in a mold
model:
When splitting the workpiece or mold volume, the parting surface or mold
volume used to do the splitting must be unblanked.
In order to split the workpiece, it must be unblanked. If the workpiece is
blanked, the All Wrkpcs split option is grayed out in the menu manager.

Module 11 | Page 16

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Blanking and Unblanking Mold Items


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Blank-Unblank
Task 1:

BLANK-UNBLANK.ASM

Blank and unblank mold items using the Blank-Unblank dialog box.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
3. Click Mold Display

from the Visibility group.

4. Select the Mold tab.


You can also press CTRL+B to access the Blank and Unblank
dialog box.
5. In the Blank and Unblank dialog
box, select Component
as
the Filter if necessary.
Press CTRL and select
BLANK-UNBLANK_REF and
BLANK-UNBLANK_WRK.
Click Blank.
6. In the Blank and Unblank dialog
box, select Volume
as the
Filter.
Select CAVITY_VOL and click
Blank.
7. In the Blank and Unblank dialog
box, select CORE_VOL and click
Blank.

8. In the Blank and Unblank dialog


box, select Parting surface
as the Filter.
Select MAIN_PART_SURF
and click Blank.

2015 PTC

Module 11 | Page 17

9. In the Blank and Unblank dialog


box, select the Unblank tab.
Select Component
as the
Filter.
Select BLANK-UNBLANK_
REF and click Unblank.
Click OK.
Task 2:

Blank and unblank mold items from the model tree and graphics
window.

1. In the model tree, right-click


SLIDER_VOL and select Blank.
2. Click Repaint
from the In
Graphics toolbar and de-select
all geometry.
3. In the graphics window select the
side parting surface, right-click,
and select Blank.
4. Click Repaint

5. In the model tree, right-click


CORE_VOL and select Unblank.
6. Click Repaint
all geometry.

and de-select

7. In the model tree, right-click


BLANK-UNBLANK_REF.PRT
and select Blank.

This completes the procedure.

Module 11 | Page 18

2015 PTC

Analyzing Split Classification


The process of determining which individual closed islands of
space should be included in the resultant mold volume is called
classifying.
An island is a closed volume of
space in the mold model.
Specify the islands to be included
in the resultant volume.
Classifying islands enables you
to create simpler manual parting
surfaces.
Figure 1 Viewing Reference
Part Geometry

Figure 2 Classifying Islands

Figure 3 Resultant Mold Volume

Analyzing Split Classification


When you split a volume, depending upon the shape of the workpiece, the
shape of the reference model, and the shape of the parting surface, the split
may create several individual closed volumes. When you create a split using
the Two Volumes option, each of these volumes must end up as part of one
volume or the other. Similarly, when you create a split using the One Volume
option, each of these volumes must end up as part of the new volume, or left
to remain in the old volume.
Each one of these individual closed volumes occupies an island of space
within the mold model. You must specify which islands of space should
belong together, or be included, in the resultant mold volume. The process of
determining which islands should be included in the resultant mold volume
is called classifying.
Each of the islands displays in the menu manager Island List. When you
hover over a given island in the menu manager, its corresponding volume
of space highlights in blue in the graphics window, as shown in Figure 2.
Each of the islands you select from the Island List are included together
to comprise the resultant mold volume. The islands that are not selected
either end up in the other mold volume (in the case of a Two Volumes split)
or discarded (in the case of a One Volume split).
2015 PTC

Module 11 | Page 19

A One Volume split always creates a situation where you must classify the
islands to be included in the resultant volume. The reason for this is that
regardless of whether you split by a parting surface or by another volume, you
must specify which side of the split you want to be included in the resultant
volume. You also must classify islands when you specify multiple parting
surfaces or mold volumes when splitting a volume.
Classifying islands in a mold model enables you to create simpler manual
parting surfaces. In Figure 1, a flat parting surface was used to create the
slider mold volume shown in Figure 3. This was done by classifying the
islands properly, as shown in Figure 2. Rather than creating a flat parting
surface, you can create a parting surface which completely conforms to the
interior of all the cuts in the reference model. You can then split the workpiece
using this more complex parting surface and not have to classify islands. The
parting surface would look like this:

Module 11 | Page 20

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Split Classification


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Split_Classification
Task 1:

SPLIT-CLASSIFICATION.ASM

Classify islands to split mold volumes correctly.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select the SPLITCLASSIFICATION_WRK.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Wireframe.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the three cuts in the side
of the reference model.
7. In the model tree, right-click
SLIDER_PARTING-SURF and
select Unblank.
8. Select Volume Split
from the
Mold Volume types drop-down
list in the Parting Surface & Mold
Volume group.
9. Click Two Volumes > All
Wrkpcs > Done from the menu
manager.
10. Select the parting surface from
the graphics window.
11. Click OK from the Select dialog
box.
12. In the menu manager, cursor
over Island 1 and notice the
corresponding space the island
occupies highlighted blue.
Select the Island 1 check box.

2015 PTC

Module 11 | Page 21

13. In the menu manager, select the


Island 3, Island 4, and Island 5
check boxes.
Click Done Sel.
14. Click OK from the Split dialog
box.
15. In the Properties dialog box, click
Shade and spin the model to
inspect the mold volume.
Type SLIDER_VOL and press
ENTER.
16. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.
17. In the Properties dialog box, click
Shade, type TEMP-MOLD_VOL,
and press ENTER.

18. Click Volume Split

19. Click Two Volumes > Mold


Volume > Done.
20. In the Search Tool, select the
TEMP-MOLD_VOL quilt and
click Add Item
.
Click Close.
21. In the model tree, right-click
CORE-CAVITY_PARTINGSURF and select Unblank.
22. Query-select the parting surface
and click OK from the Select
dialog box.

Module 11 | Page 22

2015 PTC

23. In the menu manager, select the


Island 1, Island 3, and Island
4 check boxes, and click Done
Sel.
24. Click OK from the Split dialog
box.
25. In the Properties dialog box, click
Shade and spin the model to
inspect the mold volume.
Type CAVITY_VOL and press
ENTER.
26. Orient to the Standard
Orientation.
27. In the Properties dialog box, click
Shade, type CORE_VOL and
press ENTER.

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 11 | Page 23

Module 11 | Page 24

2015 PTC

Module

12

Mold Component Extraction


Module Overview
Once the proper mold volumes have been created and split, you can now
create the mold components. You create mold components by filling the mold
volumes with material. This process is called extracting, and it automatically
converts the mold volumes into fully functional solid parts.
In this module, you learn how to extract the final solid mold components
from mold volumes.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Extract mold components from mold volumes.
Apply start models to mold components.

2015 PTC

Module 12 | Page 1

Extracting Mold Components from Volumes


You can produce mold components by filling the previously
defined mold volumes with solid material.
Mold component features:
Contain an Extract feature.
Are fully-functional parts.
Maintain a parent/child
relationship with their mold
volumes.
Mold component color-coding:
Reference model color
Blue
Orange

Figure 1 Extracted Core


Mold Component

Figure 2 Extracted Cavity


Mold Component

Figure 3 Extracted Slider


Mold Component

Extracting Mold Components from Volumes


Once the mold volumes are created and the workpiece and mold volumes
are split, you can create the final mold components. You can produce
mold components by filling the previously defined mold volumes with solid
material. This process, performed using the Cavity insert
option, is
called extracting. Extracted parts can be core and cavity pieces as well as
sliders, inserts, core pins, and so on.
The system does not automatically create mold components from every
mold volume found in the mold model. Recall that you may have created
temporary mold volumes during the split process to create your desired
mold volumes. Consequently, you must specify which mold volumes will be
extracted into mold components. When the mold components are extracted
and created, the corresponding mold volumes are automatically blanked
from the graphics window.
The extracted mold components are created in the mold model, and each
component contains an Extract feature that contains the solid geometry.
The extract feature cannot be redefined, but these components are fully
functional parts. You can retrieve them in Part mode, and add new features
to them. To save the extracted mold components, you must save the mold
Module 12 | Page 2

2015 PTC

model before erasing it from memory or exiting your current Creo Parametric
session. By default, the extracted mold components are named the same
as the volumes from which they were extracted.
Extracted mold components maintain a parent/child relationship with their
mold volumes. Therefore, the mold components automatically update when
changes are made to the mold volumes. While the mold volumes are
assembly features in the mold model, the mold components are assembly
components in the mold model.

Color-Coding of Extracted Mold Components


By default, the extracted mold components are created in the default
Creo Parametric gray color. However, the surfaces of the extracted mold
components may also display in three other potential colors:
Reference model color The mold components surfaces that touch the
reference model are color-coded the same as the reference model. In the
figures, the reference model color is red.
Blue Steel-to-steel contact between tooling component shutoffs.
Orange Steel-to-steel contact between slider mold component surfaces
and mold plates, cores, or cavities. It is important to note that only the
slider mold volumes created by calculating undercut boundaries, become
orange when the mold components are extracted. Sketched sliders and
other components have blue surfaces at their steel-to-steel contact points.

2015 PTC

Module 12 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Extracting Mold Components from


Volumes
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Components_Extract-Volume
Task 1:

EXTRACT-VOLUMES.ASM

Extract mold components from mold volumes.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. From the In Graphics toolbar,
select No Hidden
from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu and notice that the mold
volumes are surfaces.
from the
3. Select Shading
Display Style types drop-down
menu.

4. Select Cavity insert


from the Mold Component
types drop-down menu in the
Components group.
5. In the Create Mold Component
dialog box, click Select All
Press CTRL and click
TEMP-MOLD_VOL1 to
de-select it.

6. Click OK from the Create Mold


Component dialog box.
7. Notice the four new mold
components created in the
model tree.

8. Select No Hidden
from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu and notice that the mold
components are solid geometry.
9. Select Shading
from the
Display Style types drop-down
menu.

Module 12 | Page 4

2015 PTC

10. In the model tree, right-click


CORE_VOL.PRT and select
Open

11. Notice the single Extract feature


in the model tree.
12. Spin the model to inspect it and
notice the surfaces that are blue.
13. Notice the surfaces that are
orange.
14. Notice the surfaces that are
reference model color.
15. Click Close
from the Quick
Access toolbar to return to the
mold model.
16. In the model tree, right-click
CAVITY_VOL.PRT and select
Open

17. Again, notice the single Extract


feature in the model tree.
18. Spin the model to inspect it and
again notice the surfaces that
are blue.
19. Notice the surfaces that are
reference model color.
20. Click Close
mold model.

to return to the

21. In the model tree, right-click


SLIDER_VOL1.PRT and select
Open

22. Notice the orange surfaces.


23. Click Close
mold model.

to return to the

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 12 | Page 5

Applying Start Models to Mold Components


You can rename extracted mold components and apply start
models to them.
Benefits of using templates:
Datums
Layers
Parameters
View Orientations
Because each mold component
is a part model, it should be
renamed accordingly.

Figure 1 Extracted Mold


Component Model Tree

Figure 2 Renaming Mold


Components and Applying
Start Model

Applying Start Models to Mold Components


You can apply an existing start model template to components when
extracting them from mold volumes in the mold model. This is done in the
Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box. As a best
practice, you should create extracted mold components using a start model
template. Using a start model template when extracting mold components
provides you with the following benefits.
Datums Includes a set of default datum planes and a default coordinate
system
Layers
Parameters
View Orientations
These are the same benefits that you gain from using a start model template
when creating new part models.

Renaming Mold Components


By default, extracted mold components are named the same as the mold
volume from which they are extracted. You can rename the mold component
name in the Advanced section of the Create Mold Component dialog box.
This section displays the specified mold volumes that you extract. In one
column the mold volume name is displayed, and in another column the
corresponding mold component name is displayed. As a best practice you
should rename the mold components with names that are unique to the mold
Module 12 | Page 6

2015 PTC

and to the type of component being extracted. For example, a mold volume
named cavity_vol should have its corresponding mold component renamed
to widget_cavity, or it should be renamed according to your company's
standards. Extracted mold components are not volumes, so the vol suffix
should be removed. Also, mold components are part models. Therefore,
each part model should be given a unique name.
You can only rename one mold component at a time. If more than
one mold component is selected in the Advanced section of the
Create Mold Component dialog box, the fields to rename mold
components become grayed out.

2015 PTC

Module 12 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Applying Start Models to Mold


Components
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Components_Start-Model
Task 1:

APPLY_START-MODEL.ASM

Rename mold components prior to extracting them.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Select Cavity insert
from the Mold Component
types drop-down menu in the
Components group.
3. In the Create Mold Component
dialog box, click Select All
.
Click Advanced to expand it.
Notice that the mold volumes
and corresponding mold
component names are the
same.
4. In the Advanced section of
the Create Mold Component
dialog box, select mold volume
CAVITY_VOL.
Edit the Mold Component
Name to WIDGET_CAVITY
and press ENTER.
Select mold volume
CORE_VOL.
Edit the Mold Component
Name to WIDGET_CORE and
press ENTER.
Select mold volume
SLIDER_VOL.
Edit the Mold Component
Name to WIDGET_SLIDER
and press ENTER.

Module 12 | Page 8

2015 PTC

Task 2:

Apply a start model to the mold components and extract them.

1. In the Advanced section of the


Create Mold Component dialog
box, click Select All

Click Copy From


.
In the Choose template
dialog box, double-click
MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.
Notice that the Copy From field
displays the template model
that is used.
2. Click OK from the Create Mold
Component dialog box.
3. Notice the three newly created
mold components in the model
tree.
4. In the model tree, right-click
WIDGET_SLIDER.PRT and
select Open

5. In the model tree, notice the


datum features in addition to the
Extract feature.
6. From the In Graphics toolbar,
click Saved Orientations
and select BACK.
7. In the model tree, click Show
and select Layer Tree.
8. Notice the default layers.
9. Click Show
Tree.

and select Model

from the Quick


10. Click Close
Access toolbar to return to the
mold model.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 12 | Page 9

Module 12 | Page 10

2015 PTC

Module

13

Mold Features Creation


Module Overview
In this module, you learn how to create assembly-level features in a mold
model for the purpose of removing material. Mold features include waterlines,
runners, ejector pin clearance holes, and gates. You can use user-defined
features (UDFs) to define and place waterlines, runners, and gates. You
can also run a waterlines check for clearance of waterline circuits in the
mold model.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Create waterline circuits.
Analyze waterline end conditions and understand the different types.
Perform a waterlines check.
Understand the different mold analysis settings available and learn how
to save an analysis.
Create sprues and runners.
Create ejector pin clearance holes.
Create and place UDFs in a mold model.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 1

Creating Waterline Circuits


Waterlines are assembly-level features that you can use to create
water channels in the mold model.
Specify the waterline circuit
diameter.
Sketch the waterline circuit.
Section should contain only
linear entities.
Specify the mold components to
be cut.
Figure 1 Sketching the
Waterline Circuit

Figure 2 Completed Waterline

Figure 3 Cutaway of Waterline


Circuit

Creating Waterline Circuits


Waterlines are assembly-level features that you can use to create water
channels or circuits in the mold model. Waterlines are drilled holes in the
mold model components. The waterline circuits convey cooling water through
the mold components to control the cooling of molten material. The speed
of cooling the mold is directly related to the profitability of the entire mold
product line.
To create a waterline circuit, you must specify the following:
Name Determines the name of the waterline as it displays in the model
tree. You can accept the default name if desired.
Diameter Enables you to specify the diameter of the waterline hole. You
can either type a value or accept the default diameter value.
Circuit Enables you to sketch the waterline circuit path. You must specify
the sketch plane and reference plane and orientation. The sketched
section should only contain linear entities. This is because the waterline
path is ultimately drilled into the mold components. As you sketch the
circuit in Sketcher, a dashed line displays on either side of the sketch line,
as shown in Figure 1. This dashed line denotes the actual section diameter
of the circuit.
Intersected Parts Enables you to select the mold components that
the waterline circuit intersects. The following options are available for
determining which components are going to be intersected, or cut, by the
waterline:
Module 13 | Page 2

2015 PTC

Automatic update When this check box is selected, the system


automatically determines which mold components are cut by the
waterline feature. All other selection options become grayed out. When
this option is used, the automatic intersection excludes the reference
models and any molding.
Advanced intersection When this check box is selected, the system
enables you to manually define the display level separately for each
component.
Select a component to intersect Enables you to manually specify
which components are cut by the waterline feature.
AutoAdd Similar to the Automatic Update check box, when this
option is selected, the system automatically determines which mold
components are cut by the waterline feature.
Info Enables you to display information regarding the waterlines
feature in the browser.
The mold components that are specified display in the Intersected
Components dialog box. To remove any components displayed, you can
select the component and either click Remove, or right-click and select
Remove.
By default, even though the waterline is created as an assembly feature,
you can also view it within the individual mold component. The feature
displays in the mold component model tree as an assembly cut. You
can modify this behavior, however. The right column of the Intersected
Components dialog box displays the visibility level for each intersected
component which, by default, is the mold component itself. You can click in
this field and modify the visibility level of the component to the mold model
assembly. When this change is made the waterline is only visible from
within the mold model, and not within the individual mold component.
Because waterlines are actually drilled holes in the mold components, the
end of each waterline segment displays as a drill point, rather than a flat
or rounded edge.
You can create waterlines any time after the workpiece and reference
model are assembled. When the volumes are split, any previously created
waterlines are automatically subtracted from the mold volumes along with
the reference model.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 3

PROCEDURE - Creating Waterline Circuits


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Waterlines
Task 1:

WATERLINES.ASM

Create a basic waterline circuit in a mold model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:
2. Click Water Line
from the
Production Features group.
3. Type 8 as the diameter of the
waterline circuit and press
ENTER.
4. Select datum plane WLINE as
the waterline sketching plane
and click Default from the menu
manager.
5. Click Sketch View
In Graphics toolbar.

from the

6. Click References
from the
Setup group and select the
bottom of the mold component.
Click Close.
7. Enable only the following
Sketcher Display types:
.
8. Click Line Chain
the three lines.

and sketch

9. Middle-click twice and edit the


dimensions, as shown.
10. Click OK

Module 13 | Page 4

2015 PTC

11. Orient to the Standard


Orientation.
12. Disable Plane Display

13. In the Intersected Components


dialog box, select the Automatic
update check box.
Click OK.
14. Click OK from the Water Line
dialog box.
15. Notice the waterline feature in
the model tree.
16. At the top of the model tree, click
Settings

and select Tree

Filters
.
In the Model Tree Items dialog
box, select the Suppressed
objects check box and click
OK.
17. In the model tree, right-click CUT
and select Resume.
18. De-select all geometry and zoom
in on the waterline.
19. Right-click WATERLINE_1 and
select Edit

20. Edit the diameter from 8 to 10


.
and click Regenerate

21. Right-click WLINE_CAVITY.PRT


and select Open

22. Notice the assembly cuts in the


model tree.
One of the assembly cuts
is for the cutaway, and the
other is for the waterline.
23. Click Close
from the Quick
Access toolbar.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 5

Analyzing Waterline End Conditions


You can apply optional end conditions to the waterline circuit
segment endpoints.
The following end conditions can
be applied:
None
Blind
Thru
Thru w/Cbore
Figure 1 Blind Waterline End
Condition

Figure 2 Thru w/Cbore Waterline


End Condition

Figure 3 Thru Waterline End


Condition

Analyzing Waterline End Conditions


You can apply optional end conditions to the waterline circuit segment
endpoints. You can apply end conditions to ensure the circuit is capable of
being manufactured. You can apply the following end conditions:
None Causes a standard, blind end to be created on the end. By default,
each waterline circuit end has this option specified.
Blind Enables you to specify an extra drilled blind end. You can extend
the drilled end a specified distance beyond the endpoint.
Thru Enables you to create a straight hole end condition. The system
extends the drilled end out through all mold model geometry.
Thru w/Cbore Enables you to create a counterbore hole end condition.
Similar to the Thru option, the system extends the drilled end out through all
mold model geometry. However, the system also places a counterbore at
the entrance to the mold geometry. You can specify both the counterbore
diameter and depth.
In order to define a waterline circuit end condition, you must specify the ends
to which you want to apply end conditions. Rather than selecting a segment
endpoint vertex, you should select the segment itself near the end to which
you want to apply the end condition. If the endpoint you want to apply the
condition to is the intersection of two segments, the system determines which
segment endpoint to apply the end condition to based on the segment you
Module 13 | Page 6

2015 PTC

select. You can press CTRL and select multiple waterline circuit endpoints
in order to have the same end condition applied.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 7

PROCEDURE - Analyzing Waterline End Conditions


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Waterlines_End
Task 1:

END-CONDITIONS.ASM

Add various end conditions to a waterline in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Edit the definition of
WATERLINE_1.
3. In the Water Line dialog box,
double-click End Condition.
4. Select the front end of the left
waterline segment and click OK
from the Select dialog box.
5. In the menu manager, click Thru
w/Cbore > Done/Return.
6. Type 12 for the counterbore
diameter and press ENTER.
7. Type 15 for the counterbore
depth and press ENTER.

8. Select the left side of the rear


waterline segment and click OK
from the Select dialog box.

9. In the menu manager, click Blind


> Done/Return.
10. Type 8 as the value to extend the
left side and press ENTER.

Module 13 | Page 8

2015 PTC

11. Select the right side of the rear


waterline segment and click OK
from the Select dialog box.

12. In the menu manager, click Thru


> Done/Return.

13. Click Done/Return from the


menu manager.
14. Click OK from the Water Line
dialog box.
15. At the top of the model tree, click
Settings

and select Tree

Filters
.
In the Model Tree Items dialog
box, select the Suppressed
objects check box and click
OK.
16. In the model tree, right-click CUT
and select Resume.
17. De-select all geometry.
18. Spin the model and inspect the
waterline.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 9

Performing a Waterlines Check


The waterlines check helps to ensure that the waterlines are not
too close to the external surfaces of the mold model.
To perform a waterlines check, you
must specify:
Part
Waterline
Minimum Clearance
Color-coded results:
Magenta Areas within
minimum clearance.
Green Areas outside
minimum clearance.

Figure 1 Waterlines Check


Results

Figure 2 Waterlines within


Minimum Clearance

Performing a Waterlines Check


You can perform a clearance check for waterline circuits by selecting the
Waterlines option from the analysis Type drop-down list in the Mold Analysis
dialog box. The waterlines check helps to ensure that the waterlines are
not too close to the external surfaces of the mold model. To perform the
waterlines check, you must specify the following:
Part Enables you to specify the part whose external surfaces are used
for measuring the minimum clearance. You cannot specify the reference
model as the part.
Waterline Enables you to specify which waterlines to analyze. Options
include:
All Waterlines All waterlines in the mold model are analyzed.
Select Waterlines Enables you to specify which waterlines are
analyzed.
Select Surfaces Enables you to specify a surface of the mold
component to be analyzed against the waterlines and the other external
surfaces of the mold component.
Module 13 | Page 10

2015 PTC

Minimum Clearance Enables you to specify the minimum clearance the


waterlines must be from the external surfaces of the specified part.

Understanding Waterlines Check Results


The results of the waterlines check are color-coded into two categories:
Magenta All areas of the waterlines highlighted in magenta are less than
the minimum clearance specified.
Green All areas of the waterlines highlighted in green are greater than
or equal to the minimum clearance specified.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 11

PROCEDURE - Performing a Waterlines Check


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Waterlines_Check
Task 1:

WATERLINES-CHECK.ASM

Perform a waterlines check on waterline circuits in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Press CTRL and select WLINECHECK_CAVITY.PRT and
WLINE-CHECK_SLIDER.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Compenent Display Style >
Transparent.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the waterlines circuits
in the cavity and slider mold
components.
7. Click the Analysis group
drop-down menu and select
Mold Analysis

8. In the Mold Analysis dialog box,


select Waterlines from the Type
drop-down list if necessary.
and
Click Select Part
select WLINE-CHECK_
CAVITY.PRT.
Type 8 as the Minimum
Clearance and press ENTER.
Click Compute.
9. Click Repaint
from the In
Graphics toolbar.
10. Notice that only the outer ends
of the waterline circuit fall inside
of the minimum clearance
specified.

Module 13 | Page 12

2015 PTC

11. In the Mold Analysis dialog box,


edit the Minimum Clearance to
10 and click Compute.
12. Notice that only the counterbore
falls within the minimum
clearance specified.

13. In the Mold Analysis dialog box,


click Select Part
and select
WLINE-CHECK_SLIDER.PRT.
Edit the Minimum Clearance
to 6 and click Compute.
14. Click Repaint

15. Notice that it appears the


waterline circuit is properly
designed.

16. Zoom in on the waterlines circuit


and spin the model.
17. Notice that the waterlines circuit
is too close to the inner surface
of the mold component.
18. Click Close from the Mold
Analysis dialog box.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 13

19. Orient to the WLINES view


orientation.
20. In the model tree, right-click
WATERLINE_SLIDER and
select Edit

21. Edit the waterline circuit diameter


to 6 and click Regenerate
from the In Graphics toolbar.

22. Click the Analysis group


drop-down menu and select
Mold Analysis

and
Click Select Part
select WLINE-CHECK_
SLIDER.PRT.
Edit the Minimum Clearance
to 6 and click Compute.
23. Click Repaint

24. Zoom in on the waterline and


spin the model.
25. Notice that the waterline circuit
now properly falls outside of the
minimum clearance specified.
26. Click Close from the Mold
Analysis dialog box.
This completes the procedure.

Module 13 | Page 14

2015 PTC

Understanding Mold Analysis Settings


You can modify the settings of a mold analysis to achieve
different results.
Computation Settings
Modify sample type.
Modify plot resolution.
Saving Analyses
Quickly rerun a mold
analysis at different times.
Show/Blank selected
analyses.

Figure 1 Viewing Computation


Settings

Figure 2 Viewing Saved Analyses

Understanding Mold Analysis Settings


When performing a mold analysis, you can modify settings to achieve
different results. You can modify both computation and display settings. You
can also save an analysis so that it can be easily rerun at a later time.

Modifying Computation Settings


When performing a mold analysis, the following computation settings are
available:
Sample Enables you to specify how the plot resolution is calculated.
Options include Quality, Number, and Step.
Quality

Sets the plot sample type to Quality.

Number of Points

Sets the plot sample type to Number of Points.

Sets the plot sample type to Step.


Step
Resolution Adjusts the quality of the plot. For a Quality plot, you can
adjust the resolution from Low to High using a slider. For a Number of
Points plot, you can adjust the resolution by specifying the number of
points, and for a Step plot you can adjust the resolution either by specifying
a value or by using the slider from Min to Max.
You can also specify whether to add further accuracy to the mold analysis
computation by selecting the Result refinement check box. This check box
causes additional computation to get more accurate results.

Saving Analyses
You can also save mold analyses within the model you are performing the
analysis on. Saving an analysis is beneficial because it enables you to
quickly repeat the same analysis at different times without having to specify
each of the references and options.
2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 15

When saving an analysis, you must provide a name that contains no spaces.
You can save multiple analyses within the same model. All saved mold
analyses appear in the Saved Analyses area of the Mold Analysis dialog
box, as shown in Figure 2. You can show or blank analyses by selecting the
desired analysis and then clicking Show-Blank Analysis
. In Figure 2,
both the SLIDER and CAVITY analyses are shown, or visible.
You can delete a saved analysis at any point by selecting it and clicking
Delete.
You can display multiple saved analyses at the same time in the
graphics window.

Module 13 | Page 16

2015 PTC

Creating Sprues and Runners


You can create sprues, runners, and gates to channel molten
plastic into the mold cavity.
Create sprues using sketch-based
features.
Create runners and sometimes
gates using the Runner feature.
Section shapes include:
Round
Half Round
Hexagon
Trapezoid
Round Trapezoid

Figure 1 Cavity Showing Sprues,


Runners, and Gates

Figure 2 Core Showing


Runners and Gates

Creating Sprues
A sprue is the channel through which molten plastic is injected into the
mold. The sprue should be as short as possible to minimize material usage.
Typically, the sprue is tapered to ensure proper ejection from the mold cavity.
You can create sprues in the mold model using sketch-based features such
as extrudes, revolve, sweeps, and blends.

Creating Runners and Gates


You can create runners and gates in the mold model to transfer material
from the sprue to the mold cavity. The runner is the channel that guides
the molten plastic from the sprue into the mold cavity, and the gate is the
restricted entrance from the runner into the mold cavity that helps to simplify
the removal of the final molded parts from the runners.
You can use the Runner feature to create the runners in your mold model.
Depending upon the shape of your gates, you can also use the runner feature
to create them, or you can create them using sketch-based features such as
extrudes, revolves, sweeps, and blends.
You can create runners by sweeping a sketched section along a path or
trajectory. The following section shapes are available, and the dimensions
that define the shapes are shown:
2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 17

Round Assigns a circle to the runner's


cross-section.
Half Round Assigns a half circle to the
runner's cross-section.
Hexagon Assigns a six-sided polygon to the
runner's cross-section.

Trapezoid Assigns a quadrilateral to the


runner's cross-section.
Round Trapezoid Assigns a trapezoid with
an arc base to the runner's cross-section.

In addition to the shape, you must define the following items:


Name Enables you to specify the name of the Runner feature in the
model tree to be different than the default name applied by the system.
Def Size Enables you to specify the default size values for each of the
runner cross-section dimensions. The dimensions that you are prompted
to specify depend on the section shape specified.
Flow Path Enables you to either select or sketch the flow path for the
runner. If you select the flow path, you can select datum curves as the flow
path. If you sketch the flow path, you must specify the sketch plane and
reference plane and orientation. As you sketch the flow path in Sketcher,
a dashed line displays on either side of the sketch line. This dashed line
denotes the actual section diameter of the runner.
Direction Specifies the direction of runner creation.
Intsct Parts Enables you to select the mold components which the
runner intersects or cuts through. The same options available in the
Intersected Components dialog box for waterlines and ejector pin holes are
also available for runners.
Optionally, the Segment Sizes option enables you to define runners with
segments of varying size within the same runner feature. When you specify
a runner segment that you want to be of different size than the default
size, the system prompts you to specify new dimensions to define the
cross-section. Note that the runner shape specified cannot be changed for
individual segments.
You can create sprues and runners any time after the workpiece and
reference model are assembled. When the volumes are split, any previously
created sprues, runners, and gates are automatically subtracted from the
mold volumes along with the reference model.

Module 13 | Page 18

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Sprues and Runners


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Sprue_Runner
Task 1:

SPRUE-RUNNER.ASM

Create the main runner.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:

2. Select PUCK_CAVITY.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Transparent.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the 4 cavity mold model.
7. Select the SPRUE feature
already created in the mold
model.
8. Click Runner
from the
Production Features group.
9. Click Hexagon from the menu
manager.
10. Type 10 as the runner width and
press ENTER.
11. Select datum plane
MAIN_PARTING_PLN as
the sketching plane and click
Okay > Default from the menu
manager.
12. Click Centerline
from the
Centerline types drop-down
menu and sketch a centerline on
the horizontal reference.
13. Sketch and dimension the line,
as shown.
14. Click OK

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 19

15. Press CTRL, select the


PUCK_CAVITY.PRT and
PUCK_CORE.PRT, and click
OK from the Intersected
Components dialog box.
16. In the Runner dialog box,
double-click Name, edit the
Name to MAIN_RUNNER, and
press ENTER.
Click OK.
Task 2:

Create the secondary runners and gates.

1. Click Runner

and click Round from the menu manager.

2. Type 4 as the runner diameter and press ENTER.


3. Click Use Prev > Okay from the menu manager.
4. Click References
and
query-select datum plane
FRONT of the upper-right
reference model as well as its
left edge.
Click Close.
5. Click Centerline
and
sketch a centerline on both the
vertical and original horizontal
references.
6. Sketch and dimension the line,
as shown.

7. Sketch and dimension the two


smaller lines, as shown.

Module 13 | Page 20

2015 PTC

8. Drag a window around the three


lines.
from the Editing
9. Click Mirror
group and select the horizontal
centerline.
10. Click OK

11. Press CTRL, select the


PUCK_CAVITY.PRT and
PUCK_CORE.PRT, and click
OK from the Intersected
Components dialog box.
12. Click Repaint

13. In the Runner dialog


box, double-click Name,
edit the Name to
SECONDARY_RUNNER,
and press ENTER.
Click Preview.
14. In the Runner dialog box,
double-click Segment Sizes.
Press CTRL, select the four
smaller segments, and click
Done/Return from the menu
manager.
Type 2 as the runner segment
diameter and press ENTER.
Click Done.

15. Click OK from the Runner dialog


box.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 21

16. In the model tree, right-click


PUCK_CAVITY.PRT and select
Open

17. Spin the model and observe the


sprues, runners, and gates.

This completes the procedure.

Module 13 | Page 22

2015 PTC

Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes


Ejector pin clearance holes are created in mold components so
that ejector pins can pass through and push the molded part out.
Ejector pin holes are similar to
conventional holes.
You can specify a different
diameter through each
intersected component.
Available types:
Linear
Radial
Coaxial
On Point

Figure 1 Completed Ejector


Pin Holes

Figure 2 Viewing Ejector Pin


Holes in Core

Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes


The ejector pin clearance hole is a hole feature that is only available in Mold
mode. Ejector pin clearance holes are created in the mold components so
that ejector pins can pass through and push the molded part out. An ejector
pin clearance hole is very similar to the conventional hole feature except that
you can specify a different diameter through each component that the hole
intersects in the mold model. An ejector pin hole is created as an assembly
feature in the mold model.
You can create the following types of ejector pin clearance holes:
Linear Enables you to create an ejector pin hole on a selected reference,
offset linearly from two references.
Radial Enables you to create an ejector pin hole on a selected reference,
at a radial offset from an axis, and at an angle from a plane. When you
specify a radial hole type and select the axis, you can specify the radial
offset in the following ways:
Diameter Places the hole with a diameter dimension for the offset.
Radius Places the hole with a radius dimension for the offset.
Linear Places the hole with a linear dimension for the offset.
Coaxial Enables you to create an ejector pin hole on a selected reference,
through a selected datum axis. If ejector pins are already assembled in the
mold model, then you can use the coaxial hole to easily place the ejector
pin clearance holes. You can also use the axes created for the ejector pin
pads created in the reference model.
2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 23

On Point Enables you to create an ejector pin hole through a specified


datum point. If there are several datum points in the mold model where
the holes should be placed, you can simultaneously place holes at each
point within the same hole feature.
Once the ejector pin hole type and placement references have been defined,
you must specify the following options:
Direction Determines the direction of hole creation. You can flip the
direction.
Intersected Parts Enables you to select the mold components that the
ejector clearance hole intersects. The following options are available for
determining which components are going to be intersected, or cut, by the
ejector pin:
Auto Update Intrscts When this check box is selected, the system
automatically determines which mold components are cut by the ejector
pin hole feature. All other selection options become grayed out. When
this option is used, the automatic intersection excludes the reference
models and any molding.
Select a component to intersect Enables you to manually specify
which components are cut by the ejector pin hole feature.
AutoAdd Similar to the Auto Update Intrscts check box, when this
option is selected, the system automatically determines which mold
components are cut by the ejector pin hole feature.
Info Enables you to display information regarding the ejector pin hole
feature in the browser.
The mold components that are specified display in the Intersected
Components dialog box. To remove any components displayed, you can
select the component and either click Remove, or right-click and select
Remove.
Counterbore Each ejector pin clearance hole contains a counterbore.
You must also specify the counterbore diameter and depth.

Module 13 | Page 24

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating Ejector Pin Clearance Holes


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Ejector-Pin
Task 1:

EJECTOR-PIN.ASM

Create a coaxial ejector pin clearance hole.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:
2. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Transparent.
5. Select the Mold tab.
6. Notice the four ejector pin pads
on the reference model.
7. Click the Production Features
group drop-down menu and
select Ejector Pin Hole

8. In the menu manager, click


Coaxial > Done.
9. Select datum axis A_6.
10. Select the top surface of the
EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and click
Okay from the menu manager.
11. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT
and specify a hole diameter of
0.6.
12. Click OK from the Intersected
Components dialog box.
13. Type 1.2 as the counterbore
diameter and press ENTER.
14. Type 1 as the counterbore depth
and press ENTER.
15. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole
dialog box.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 25

Task 2:

Create an On Point ejector pin clearance hole.

1. Click the Production Features


group drop-down menu and
select Ejector Pin Hole

2. In the menu manager, click On


Point > Done.
3. Select datum point EJ-PIN and
click Done.
4. Select the top surface of the
EJECTOR_CORE.PRT and click
Okay.
5. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT
and specify a hole diameter of
0.6.
6. Click OK from the Intersected
Components dialog box.
7. Type 1.2 as the counterbore
diameter.
8. Type 1 as the counterbore depth.
9. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole
dialog box.
Task 3:

Create a Linear ejector pin clearance hole.

1. Click the Production Features


group drop-down menu and
select Ejector Pin Hole

2. In the menu manager, click


Linear > Done.
3. Select the top surface of the
EJECTOR_CORE.PRT as the
placement plane.
4. Select the front left
EJECTOR_CORE.PRT surface
and type 5.5 as the offset
distance.

Module 13 | Page 26

2015 PTC

5. Select the front right


EJECTOR_CORE.PRT surface
and type 8 as the offset distance.
6. Click Okay from the menu
manager.
7. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT
and specify a hole diameter of
0.6.

8. Click OK from the Intersected


Components dialog box.
9. Type 1.2 as the counterbore
diameter.
10. Type 1 as the counterbore depth.
11. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole
dialog box.

Task 4:

Create a Radial ejector pin clearance hole.

1. Click the Production Features


group drop-down menu and
select Ejector Pin Hole

2. In the menu manager, click


Radial > Done.
3. Select the top surface of the
EJECTOR_CORE.PRT in the
upper-right quadrant as the
placement point.
4. Select datum axis A_1 as the
radial dimension origin.
5. Select datum plane
MOLD_RIGHT to the right
of datum axis A_1 as the radial
dimension origin.
6. Type 225 as the Angle and press
ENTER.
7. Click Radius > Done from the menu manager.
8. Type 3.75 as the radius value.
9. Click Okay from the menu manager.
10. Select EJECTOR_CORE.PRT in the bottom-left quadrant and specify
a hole diameter of 0.6.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 27

11. Click OK from the Intersected


Components dialog box.
12. Type 1.2 as the counterbore
diameter.
13. Type 1 as the counterbore depth.
14. Click OK from the Ej Pin Hole
dialog box.
15. Disable Plane Display
Display

, Axis

, and Point Display

.
This completes the procedure.

Module 13 | Page 28

2015 PTC

Creating UDFs
User-defined features (UDFs) save time by helping establish a
library of commonly used geometry.
Define a UDF from a template
model.
Standalone
Reference Part option
Subordinate
Select features to include.
Must be sequential
Define prompts.
Every reference requires a
prompt.
Define any variable items
(optional).
Variable elements or
dimensions
Family Table

Figure 1 Template Model

Figure 2 Highlighted Surface


While Defining Prompts

Creating UDFs
User-defined features (UDFs) are groups of features, references, and
dimensions that can be saved for use on future models. UDFs save time by
helping you establish a library of commonly used geometry.

Defining a UDF from a Template Model


To create a UDF, you must first create a "template" part containing the same
base geometry that is in the target model (new model). Then model the
features that you wish to include in the UDF on this part. An example is
shown in Figure 1. When modeling the features, be sure to consider the
number of references being created. In most cases, minimizing the number
of references makes the most efficient UDFs.
Define the UDF (*.gph file) in the UDF library, and give it a recognizable name.
The UDF library location is most likely a location unique to your company,
and is defined by your administrator. The UDF library can be accessed from
the Group Directory Common Folder, which displays when appropriate.
2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 29

Specify the storage option type. There are two types of storage options:
Subordinate Creates a reference to the original template model and
automatically uses the template model as a reference part to guide the
UDF placement in the future. The original model must be present for the
subordinate UDF to function. If you make any dimensional changes to the
original model, they are automatically reflected in the UDF.
Standalone Does not reference the template model. It copies all the
original model information into the UDF file. If you make any changes to
the original model, they are not reflected in the UDF. When you create a
standalone UDF, you have the option to create a separate reference part.
If created, the reference part has the same name as the UDF, but with a
_GP suffix.

Selecting Features to Include


Next, you must select the features to be placed in the UDF. The features
must be sequential in the model tree.

Defining Prompts
You must define a prompt for each reference created within the selected
features. All references from the features selected for the UDF require
prompts. The prompts are displayed for each original feature reference
when placing a UDF to help you select a corresponding reference in the
target model. Therefore, the prompts you create for each reference should
be descriptive. Each reference is highlighted in the graphics window as you
define its prompt, as shown in Figure 2. If a reference was used to create
more than one feature, you are asked to create either Single or Multiple
prompts for that reference.
Single Specifies a single prompt for the reference used in several
features. When the UDF is placed, the prompt appears only once, but the
reference you select for this prompt applies to all features in the group
that use the same reference.
Multiple Specifies an individual prompt for each feature that uses this
reference. If you select Multiple, each feature using this reference is
highlighted, so you can type a different prompt for each feature.

Defining Variable Items


You can also define any variable items to be stored in the UDF. This is an
optional step in UDF creation. Variable dimensions provide a prompt for a
dimension value upon placement. Variable elements enable the feature's
dashboard to be accessed during placement, to redefine the feature for the
current application. A family table enables you to create different instances of
the feature, with each instance containing different combinations of features,
dimensions, and parameters.

Modifying a UDF
When the UDF is complete, a *.gph file is saved to the current directory. You
can edit a defined UDF by selecting the Modify option in the UDF menu.

Module 13 | Page 30

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating UDFs


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Tools\Create_udf
Task 1:

CREATE_UDF.PRT

Create a UDF from a feature in a part model.

1. Enable only the following Datum


Display types:

2. Right-click Extrude 2 in
the model tree and select
Information > Reference
Viewer.
3. In the Reference Viewer dialog
box, notice that Extrude 2
references datum plane RIGHT
and Extrude 1.
4. Click the down arrow next to
Extrude 1 and cursor over each
of the surface references.
5. Notice that the top, flat surface
and the circular surface are the
two references on the model.
6. Click Close from the Reference
Viewer.
7. In the ribbon, select the Tools
tab.
8. Click UDF Library
Utilities group.

from the

9. Click Create from the menu


manager.
10. Type keyway as the name and
press ENTER.
11. In the menu manager, click
Subordinate > Done > Add >
Select.
12. Select Extrude 2 as the feature
to add and click Done/Return.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 31

13. Notice the top surface highlighted


in red. This is the first required
reference.
14. Notice the prompt for you to type
the prompt for the surface.
15. Type sketching plane and press
ENTER.

16. Notice datum plane highlighted in


red. This is the second required
reference.
17. Notice the prompt for you to type
the prompt for the surface.
18. Type orientation reference
plane and press ENTER.

19. Notice the cylindrical surface


highlighted in red. This is the
third required reference.
20. Notice the prompt for you to type
the prompt for the surface.
21. Type cylinder surface and
press ENTER.
22. Click Done/Return from the
menu manager.
23. In the UDF dialog box, select Var Dims and click Define.
24. Zoom in on Extrude 2 and select the left (width) and right (length)
2 dimensions.
25. Click Done/Return > Done/Return from the menu manager.
26. Notice that the first dimension is
highlighted.
27. Notice the prompt for you to type
the prompt for the dimension.
28. Type key width and press
ENTER.

Module 13 | Page 32

2015 PTC

29. Notice that the second dimension


is highlighted.
30. Notice the prompt for you to type
the prompt for the dimension.
31. Type key length and press
ENTER.
32. Click OK > Done/Return to
complete UDF creation.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 33

Placing UDFs
To save time, place user-defined features (UDFs) from your
company's UDF library into your model.
Open existing UDF (*.gph)
Select Placement references
Prompts can aid you
Edit Variable Dimensions and
Annotations Elements
Options
Scaling
Dimension display
Redefine features on-the-fly
Adjustments
Flip orientation

Figure 2 Selecting References


for UDF Placement

Figure 1 Viewing References


on the Original UDF

Figure 3 The Placed UDF

Placing UDFs
If you recreate the same geometry regularly when creating your design
models, it can be more efficient to have the system create that geometry for
you using UDFs. Creating geometry by placing a pre-existing UDF can be
much faster than creating it new each time.

Opening an Existing UDF (*.gph)


When placing a UDF, first you must open the target model. You can insert a
UDF by clicking User-Defined Feature
from the Get Data group in the
ribbon, and selecting the corresponding *.gph file. The original template
model is required when placing a subordinate UDF. Creo Parametric provides
the User Defined Feature Placement dialog box to enable you to easily place
UDFs in multiple models.
When you place a UDF, the system copies the features into the target model.
The copied features become a group. The resulting group of features created
from a UDF can be dependent or independent of the UDF.
Module 13 | Page 34

2015 PTC

Selecting Placement References for the Prompts


Next, you must select references in the target model for each prompt that
was defined during the creation of the UDF. When selecting the references,
you can view the reference part in a subwindow to help you select the
correct references. As you select references, the UDF preview placement
dynamically updates in the graphics window.

Editing Variable Dimensions and Annotation Elements


You can edit any of the items defined as Variable Items during UDF creation.
These include Dimensions, Parameters, and any Annotation Element Items.

Specifying Options
Next, you can specify options, such as scaling dimensions upon placement.
You can keep the same dimension values or feature sizes, or specify a
scaling factor for the features to be placed. This enables you to scale the size
of the UDF for different size models, or between models of different units.
Plus, you can specify whether you want to lock, unlock, or hide dimensions of
the elements that are not specified as variables in the UDF.
You also have the ability to redefine any features contained in the UDF
on-the-fly. This enables you to customize a UDF upon placement. After
selecting features to redefine, you must step the regeneration of the UDF
back past the selected features, and then step forward to regenerate them.
After the selected UDF feature is regenerated, its dashboard appears,
enabling you to redefine it.

Adjusting Placement Orientation and Finishing Placement


Certain portions of UDFs, depending on what they are, can be oriented in
one of two ways. These items are displayed as Orientation Items in the
Adjustments tab. You can select each available Orientation Item and flip its
orientation, watching the preview dynamically update. If the placement is
successful, a local group is created in the model tree. Items hidden in the
UDF remain in their hidden status when placed into the model.
You can duplicate UDFs easily using the Copy and Paste tools.

Updating a Modified UDF


If you make the placed group of features independent of the UDF, then it
results in all the UDF information being copied to the target model as a group
without any associative ties to the UDF. If the UDF is modified, the copied
group is not updated. However, if you establish a dependency to the original
UDF, then changes to the fixed dimensions of the UDF cause a change to the
group. You must manually update the group to the UDF change by clicking
UDF Operations > Update All from the Operations group drop-down menu
and then regenerating the model.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 35

PROCEDURE - Placing UDFs


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Feature_Tools\Place_UDF
Task 1:

PLACE_UDF.PRT

Place a UDF for a keyway in a model.

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. Click User-Defined Feature


from the Get Data group.
Select KEYWAY.GPH and click Open.
Accept the default selection of Advanced reference configuration
and click OK.
3. Notice that a reference model
has been created for this UDF,
and displays in a subwindow.
Notice that the first required
reference is highlighted in the
subwindow, and placement
preview of the feature is shown
in the main graphics window.
Notice that Reference 1 is
highlighted in the User Defined
Feature Placement dialog box
and the description prompt
reads sketching plane.
Select a corresponding planar
surface, as shown.
4. Select Reference 2 in the dialog
box.
Notice that this reference is
highlighted in the subwindow.
Notice that the description
prompt reads orientation
reference plane.
Select a corresponding plane,
as shown.

Module 13 | Page 36

2015 PTC

5. Select Reference 3 in the dialog


box.
Notice that this reference is
highlighted in the subwindow.
Also notice that the description
prompt reads cylinder
surface.
Select a corresponding
surface, as shown.

6. In the User Defined Feature


Placement dialog box, select the
Variables tab.
7. Edit the Value for the d5
dimension from 2.00 to 4.

8. In the User Defined Feature


Placement dialog box, select the
Adjustments tab.
9. In the User Defined Feature
Placement dialog box, click Flip
and then click Accept

For a more complex UDF,


there may be multiple
reference directions that can
be flipped. The system lists
each reference direction
in the dialog box, enabling
you to flip/preview each
reference.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 13 | Page 37

Module 13 | Page 38

2015 PTC

Module

14

Filling and Opening the Mold


Module Overview
In this module, you learn how to create the mold result (also known as the
molding) after extracting mold components. You create the molding by
simulating the filling of the mold cavity with molten material through mold
features such as sprues, runners, and gates.
You can then simulate the mold opening process in order to check the
correctness of your design. Draft and interference checks can be performed
to verify proper mold opening.

Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
Create a molding.
Simulate the mold opening sequence.
Check draft on mold components during the opening of the mold.
Check interference on mold components during the opening of the mold.
View mold information.

2015 PTC

Module 14 | Page 1

Creating a Molding
You can create the molding by filling the mold cavity through
the sprue, runners, and gates.
Molding parts:
Contain a Molding feature.
Are fully-functional parts.
Maintain a parent/child
relationship with mold model
components and features.
There can be only one molding
part in the model.

Figure 1 Molding Part

Figure 2 Another Molding Part

Figure 3 Mold Model

Creating a Molding
When a mold is filled, molten plastic is injected into the sprue, and it then
travels through the runners and gates to fill the mold cavity. The solidified
result is known as the molding. There can be only one molding part in the
model at a time.
Creo Parametric enables you to simulate the filling of the mold cavity and
generate the molding. In addition to the mold cavity, the sprues, runners, and
gates are also filled to generate the final molding. The molding part is created
by using the following molding formula:
Molding = sum of all current workpiece geometry - assembly level cuts
that intersect the workpiece (waterlines, for example) - all extracted parts
(sliders and cores, for example) - ejector pin clearance holes
The molding part is created in the mold model, and it contains a single
Molding feature that contains the solid geometry. The molding feature
cannot be redefined, but the part is a fully functional part. You can retrieve
it in Part mode and perform various operations on the molding part such as
removing excess material using Pro/NC, calculating mass properties, and
also generating a mesh for flow analysis. To save the molding part, you must
save the mold model before erasing it from memory or exiting your current
Creo Parametric session.
The molding part maintains a parent/child relationship with the mold
components and assembly level features. Therefore, the molding
automatically updates when changes are made to the mold components or
assembly level features. For example, if the sprue diameter is increased, the
molding part automatically updates to reflect the larger diameter.
Module 14 | Page 2

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Creating a Molding


Close Window
Mold\Molding
Task 1:

Erase Not Displayed


MOLDING.ASM

Create a molding in a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. In the graphics window, select
MLD_HUB_MOLD_CAVITY.
PRT.
3. In the ribbon, select the View
tab.
4. Click the Model Display group
drop-down menu and select
Component Display Style >
Transparent.
5. Notice the sprue and runner.
6. In the ribbon, select the Mold
tab.
7. Click Create Molding
the Components group.

from

8. Type HUB_MOLDING as the


Part name and press ENTER.
9. Press ENTER to accept the
default Mold Part Common
Name [hub_molding.prt].
10. Notice the new component
created in the model tree called
HUB_MOLDING.PRT.
11. Right-click HUB_MOLDING.PRT
and select Open

12. Spin the model and inspect the


molding part.
13. Notice the single Molding feature
in the model tree.

This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 14 | Page 3

Opening the Mold


You can simulate the mold opening process by defining steps
and moves in the mold model.
Define steps.
Define moves within steps.
Rules:
Each step can contain
several moves.
Components can be in
only one move per step.
A move may contain
several members.

Figure 1 Fully Opened Mold

Figure 2 Closed Mold

Figure 3 Partially Open Mold

Opening the Mold


You can simulate the mold opening process to determine whether your final
design matches your original design intent. The mold opening process is a
series of steps, containing one or more moves. You can specify moves for
any component, or member, of the mold model except the reference model
and the workpiece. It is convenient to blank the reference model, workpiece,
and all mold volumes, as well as the parting lines and surfaces before
opening the mold.
In order to simulate the mold opening process, you must define the following:
Define Move An instruction to move one or more members of the mold
model. When defining a move, you must specify the following items:
The members to be moved.
The direction reference of the movement. You can select a linear edge,
axis, or plane to indicate the direction. When the direction reference is
specified, an arrow indicates the positive direction.
The offset value. The members move the amount specified in the
direction of the reference specified. The members move parallel to the
Module 14 | Page 4

2015 PTC

edge or axis, or normal to the plane. You can specify a positive offset
value or a negative offset value to move the member in the opposite
direction.
Define Step A collection of defined moves for opening the mold.
You can also perform the following operations on the mold opening simulation:
Delete Enables you to delete an existing step.
Delete All Enables you to delete all existing steps.
Modify Enables you to modify an existing step by adding or deleting
moves from the step.
Modify Dim Enables you to modify the offset value of a given move. You
must regenerate the mold model in order for the new value to take effect.
Reorder Enables you to switch the order of existing steps. You can
specify the step you want reordered, then select the step that you want it
to become.
Explode Enables you to simulate the mold opening by stepping through
the sequence, in order, one step at a time. Members included in the moves
of the step are translated according to the specified offsets. You can
continue to step through all the steps in the sequence. A message in the
message window indicates when all components in the mold model have
been successfully exploded. You can also animate the entire opening
sequence.

Rules for Defining a Move


You must remember the following rules when defining moves:
Each step may contain several moves that are performed simultaneously.
A member can be included in only one move per step.
A move may contain several members, but they are all offset in the same
direction and by the same value.

2015 PTC

Module 14 | Page 5

PROCEDURE - Opening the Mold


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Opening
Task 1:

OPEN-MOLD.ASM

Create a mold opening sequence of steps.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Click Mold Opening
Analysis group.

from the

3. Click Define Step > Define


Move from the menu manager.
4. Select OPEN-MOLD_SLIDER1.
PRT and click OK from the
Select dialog box.
5. Select the top, front edge to
define the direction.
6. Type -150 and press ENTER.
7. Click Define Move from the
menu manager.
8. Query-select OPEN-MOLD_
SLIDER2.PRT and click OK from
the Select dialog box.
9. Select the top, front edge to
define the direction.
10. Type 150 and press ENTER.

11. Click Done from the menu


manager.

Module 14 | Page 6

2015 PTC

12. Click Define Step > Define


Move.
13. Select OPEN-MOLD_CAVITY.
PRT and click OK from the
Select dialog box.
14. Select the right, vertical edge to
define the direction.
15. Type 250 and press ENTER.
16. Click Done from the menu
manager.

17. Click Define Step > Define


Move.
18. Select OPEN-MOLD_MOLDING.
PRT and click OK from the Select
dialog box.
19. Select the right, vertical edge to
define the direction.

2015 PTC

Module 14 | Page 7

20. Type 100 and press ENTER.


21. Click Done from the menu
manager.

Task 2:

Simulate the mold opening.

1. Click Explode > Open Next from


the menu manager.
2. Click Open Next two more times
to step through the mold opening
sequence.
3. The OPEN-MOLD_CAVITY.PRT
needs to open before the sliders.
4. Click Reorder > Step 1 from the
menu manager.
5. Click Step 2 as the new step for
Step 1 to become.
6. Click Explode > Open Next.
7. Notice that the cavity now opens
first.
8. Click Open Next two more times
to step through the mold opening
process.

9. Click Explode > Animate All from the menu manager to animate
the full mold opening sequence.
This completes the procedure.

Module 14 | Page 8

2015 PTC

Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step


You can perform draft checking on mold components during
the mold opening sequence.
Specify the step to check.
Specify the following:
Pull direction
Draft Angle
One Side/Both Sides
Full Color/Three Color
Part or surfaces to check

Figure 2 Draft Check on a Slider

Figure 1 Opened Mold

Figure 3 Draft Check on the Molding

Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step


You can perform draft checking on mold components during the mold opening
sequence. You can use draft checking to determine whether the mold
components have the correct surfaces drafted and suitable draft angles in
order to facilitate the mold opening process.
In order to perform a draft check, you must first specify on which step of
the opening sequence you want to perform the draft check. You must also
specify the following items to perform a draft check during the mold opening
sequence:
Pull Dir Specifies the pull direction to be used for the draft check. You
can specify the pull direction using either of the following methods:
Specify Enables you to select a pull direction. You can filter the pull
direction reference by plane, coordinate system, curve, edge, or axis
and specify the proper reference. You can also flip the pull direction to
the opposite side of the reference.
Move Num Enables you to specify a pull direction reference by
specifying a move number in the step.
Draft Angle Enables you to specify the desired draft angle to check.
One Side/Both Sides Enables you to specify whether the draft check is
performed on one or both sides of the direction reference.
Full Color/Three Color Enables you to specify whether the display is
shown using the full color spectrum or with three colors.
Part or surface to check for drafting Once you have specified the pull
direction and draft angle, you must specify a part to check for drafting or a
surface to check for drafting.
2015 PTC

Module 14 | Page 9

PROCEDURE - Draft Checking a Mold Opening Step


Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Opening_Draft-Check
Task 1:

DRAFT-CHECK.ASM

Perform draft checks on mold opening sequence steps.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Click Mold Opening
Analysis group.

from the

3. Click Explode > Open Next from


the menu manager.
4. Notice that the DRAFT-CHECK_
CAVITY.PRT opens in the first
step, and that it opens upward.
5. Click Open Next from the menu
manager.
6. Notice that the sliders open next
in the second step, horizontal to
the mold model pull direction.
7. Click Open Next.
8. Notice that the DRAFT-CHECK_
MOLDING.PRT is ejected in
the third step, and that it opens
upward.

9. Click Modify > Step 2 > Draft


Check > Both Sides > Three
Color > Done from the menu
manager.
10. Click Move Num > Move 1 from
the menu manager.
11. Type 2 as the draft check angle
and press ENTER.
12. Select DRAFT-CHECK_
SLIDER1.PRT and notice the
draft.

Module 14 | Page 10

2015 PTC

13. Click Continue > Setup Dft Ck


from the menu manager.
14. Select the Pull Dir check box
and click Both Sides > Three
Color > Done > Move Num >
Move 2 from the menu manager.
15. Select DRAFT-CHECK_
SLIDER2.PRT and notice the
draft.
16. Click Done/Return >
Done/Return > Done from
the menu manager.
17. Click Modify > Step 3 > Draft
Check > One Side > Full Color
> Done.
18. Click Move Num > Move 1.
19. Type 2 as the draft check angle
and press ENTER.
20. Select DRAFT-CHECK_
MOLDING.PRT and notice the
draft.
21. Click Continue and select
DRAFT-CHECK_CORE.PRT
and notice the draft.
22. Click Done/Return >
Done/Return > Done >
Done/Return.
This completes the procedure.

2015 PTC

Module 14 | Page 11

Interference Checking a Mold Opening Step


Creo Parametric enables you to check moving parts for
interference with the static parts for each move you define.
Define the move to perform the
interference check on.
Specify the static part to check
for interference with.
Interferences highlighted:
Curves
Points

Figure 1 Interference Curves

Figure 2 Interference Point

Interference Checking a Mold Opening Step


Creo Parametric enables you to check moving parts for interference with a
static part for each move you define. After you have defined a move, you
must select a static part to check for interference with the current part that
you have defined for the move. Areas that are interfering either have their
curves highlighted, as shown in Figure 1 or, if interference curves cannot be
found, the resulting interference is highlighted by a red point, as shown in
Figure 2. You can delete the move and try another method of opening the
mold to prevent the interference of parts. You may have to redefine your
mold components.

Module 14 | Page 12

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Interference Checking a Mold Opening


Step
Close Window

Erase Not Displayed

Mold\Opening_Interference
Task 1:

INTERFERENCE.ASM

Perform interference checking on mold opening sequence steps.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Click Mold Opening
Analysis group.

from the

3. Click Explode > Open Next from


the menu manager.
4. Notice the INTERFERENCE_
CAVITY.PRT opens in the first
step, and that it opens upward.

5. Click Open Next from the menu


manager.
6. Notice that the sliders open next
in the second step, horizontal to
the mold model pull direction.
7. Click Open Next.
8. Notice the INTERFERENCE_
MOLDING.PRT is ejected in
the third step, and that it opens
upward.
9. Click Modify > Step 1 >
Interference > Move 1 from the
menu manager.
10. Query-select INTERFERENCE_
MOLDING.PRT as the static
part.
11. Notice that the status bar
states that no interference was
detected between the cavity and
the molding.

2015 PTC

Module 14 | Page 13

12. Click Static Part from the


menu manager and select
INTERFERENCE_SLIDER1.
PRT.
13. Notice that there is no
interference between the
slider and the cavity.
14. Click Done/Return > Done from
the menu manager.
15. Click Modify > Step 2 >
Interference > Move 1 from the
menu manager.
16. Select INTERFERENCE_
MOLDING.PRT as the static
part.
17. Notice the highlighted
interference curves between
the molding and the slider.
18. Click Done/Return.
19. Click Interference > Move 2
from the menu manager.
20. Select INTERFERENCE_
MOLDING.PRT as the static
part.
21. Notice the highlighted
interference curves between
the molding and the second
slider.
22. Click Done/Return > Done.
23. Click Modify > Step 3 >
Interference > Move 1 from the
menu manager.
24. Select INTERFERENCE_CORE.
PRT as the static part.
25. Notice the highlighted
interference point
between the molding and
INTERFERENCE_CORE.PRT.
26. Click Done/Return > Done >
Done/Return.
This completes the procedure.

Module 14 | Page 14

2015 PTC

Viewing Mold Information


You can view information about your mold model any time you
are in Mold mode.
View the following information:
BOM
Components
Cavity Layouts
Split Volumes
Created Volumes
Parting Surf
Split
Last Volume
Shrinkage
Figure 1 Viewing Created
Volumes Information

Figure 2 Viewing Split Volumes


Information

Viewing Mold Information


You can view information about your mold model any time you are in Mold
mode by clicking the Analysis group drop-down menu and selecting Mold
. You can view the following types of information about the mold:
BOM Displays a bill of materials of all components found in the mold
model.
Components Displays information on all the components in the mold
model, including reference models, workpiece, extracted components,
and the molding.
Cavity layouts Displays information on all cavity layouts. You can view
the coordinate system references used for placement of the cavity, the
layout type, the number of cavities in respective directions, the names and
locations of each cavity, and the overall workpiece size.
Split volumes Displays all volumes created in the mold model as a result
of split operations. You can view the mold volume name, its display status
in the mold model, and its feature ID.
2015 PTC

Module 14 | Page 15

Created volumes Displays information on all sketched mold volumes in


the mold model. You can view the mold volume name, its display status in
the mold model, and its feature ID.
Parting surface Displays information on all parting surfaces created in the
mold model. You can view the parting surface name, its display status in
the mold model, and its feature ID.
Split Displays all the split operations performed in the mold model. You
can view the parent and child feature ID's of the split, the parting surface
used, and the resulting volumes created.
Last volume Displays the last created volume in the mold model. You
can view the mold volume name, how it was created, its display status in
the mold model, and its feature ID.
Shrinkage Displays any shrinkage applied to the reference model. If the
mold model contains more than one reference model, you must specify
for which reference model you want shrinkage information. You can view
the coordinate system specified for the shrinkage, the shrinkage formula
used, and the shrink factors used.
You can specify whether you want the output displayed in an Information
window within Creo Parametric, whether you want it written to a file, or both.

Module 14 | Page 16

2015 PTC

PROCEDURE - Viewing Mold Information


Close Window
Mold\Information
Task 1:

Erase Not Displayed


MOLD-INFO.ASM

Investigate the information for a mold model.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.


2. Click the Analysis group
drop-down menu and select
Mold

3. In the Mold Information dialog


box, clear all Type check boxes
except for Shrinkage.
Clear the To file check box,
leaving the To screen check
box selected.
Click Apply.
4. Click Close from the information
window.
5. In the Mold Information dialog
box, clear the Shrinkage check
box.
Select the Cavity layouts
check box.
Click Apply.
6. Click Close from the information
window.

7. In the Mold Information dialog


box, clear the Cavity layouts
check box.
Select the Created volumes
check box.
Click Apply.
8. Click Close from the information
window.

2015 PTC

Module 14 | Page 17

9. In the Mold Information dialog


box, clear the Created volumes
check box.
Select the Parting surface
check box.
Click Apply.
10. Click Close from the information
window.
11. In the Mold Information dialog
box, clear the Parting surface
check box.
Select the Split volumes
check box.
Click Apply.
12. Click Close from the information
window.

13. In the Mold Information dialog


box, clear the Split volumes
check box.
Select the BOM check box.
Click Apply.
14. Click Close from the information
window.
15. Click Close from the Mold
Information dialog box.

This completes the procedure.

Module 14 | Page 18

2015 PTC

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen